Yamaha RX-V3300 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V3300

Categorie: Ontvanger

Type: Handleiding

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V3300

AV Receiver

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

V977800-1

0100V3300(UA)-cv1/4 02.8.21, 7:06 PM1

I CAUTION

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert

you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of

important operating and maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature accompanying the

appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended

by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause the

product and cart combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or

rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the

manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into

the product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

0101V3300_Cau_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:04 PM2

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONSIMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION II

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved

by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the

FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high

quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this

product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC

Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.

Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in

harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and,

if not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and

“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one

of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular,

specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the

grounding system of the building, as close to the point of

cable entry as practical.

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in

performance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are

required, be sure the service technician has used

replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have

the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric

shock, or other hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or

repairs to this product, ask the service technician to

perform safety checks to determine that the product is in

proper operating condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the

antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA

70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of

the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in

wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding

conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection

to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the

grounding electrode.

0101V3300_Cau_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:04 PM3

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at

least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and

20 cm on the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,

motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping

or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and

may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord

from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.

The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this

unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit

itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In

this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the

space below.

Model:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe future reference.

III CAUTION

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment

by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through

loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

0101V3300_Cau_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:04 PM4

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

CONTENTS

ADVANCED OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 46

Control Area ............................................................ 46

Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................... 47

Learn Feature .......................................................... 48

Changing the Source Name in the Display

Window ............................................................... 49

Using the Macro Feature ......................................... 50

Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed

Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes .. 52

Clearing a Learned Function ................................... 53

Clearing a Macro Function ...................................... 53

Each Component Control Area ............................... 55

SET MENU ........................................................... 60

Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 60

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 61

2 LOW FRQ TEST ................................................ 65

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right

main speakers)..................................................... 65

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 66

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) .......... 66

6 INPUT RENAME ............................................... 66

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................. 67

8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 68

9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) .............. 68

10LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 68

11D-RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 69

12SP DELAY .......................................................... 69

13DISPLAY SET .................................................... 70

14MEMORY GUARD ............................................ 71

156CH INPUT SET ................................................ 71

16ZONE2 SET ........................................................ 72

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT

SPEAKERS ....................................................... 73

SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 74

Setting the Sleep Timer ........................................... 74

Canceling the Sleep Timer ...................................... 74

ZONE 2 ................................................................. 75

Zone 2 Connections ................................................. 75

Remote Control in Zone 2 ....................................... 76

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER

EDITING .......................................................... 77

What Is a Sound Field? ........................................... 77

Sound Field Program Parameters ............................ 77

Changing Parameter Settings .................................. 78

Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ....... 78

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS .............................................. 79

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... 83

GLOSSARY .......................................................... 88

SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 90

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS ............................................................ 1

FEATURES ............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3

Checking the Package Contents ................................ 3

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ................ 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front Panel ................................................................ 4

Remote Control ......................................................... 6

Using the Remote Control ......................................... 7

Front Panel Display ................................................... 8

Rear Panel ................................................................. 9

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 10

Speakers to Be Used ................................................ 10

Speaker Placement .................................................. 11

Connecting the Speakers ......................................... 12

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15

Before Connecting Components ............................. 15

Connecting Video Components ............................... 15

Connecting Audio Components .............................. 18

Connecting the Antennas ......................................... 20

Connecting to an External Amplifier ...................... 21

Connecting to the 6CH INPUT Jacks ..................... 21

Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 22

Turning on the Power .............................................. 23

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) .......................... 24

OSD Modes ............................................................. 24

Selecting the OSD Mode ......................................... 24

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 25

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A

through 1H .......................................................... 25

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT

LEVELS ............................................................ 26

Before You Begin .................................................... 26

TEST DOLBY SUR. ............................................... 26

TEST DSP ............................................................... 28

BASIC OPERATION

BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................. 29

Input Modes and Indications ................................... 31

Selecting a Sound Field Program ............................ 32

Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC

or Neo: 6 ............................................................. 33

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING

(DSP) ................................................................. 35

Understanding Sound Fields ................................... 35

Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 35

CINEMA-DSP ........................................................ 35

Straight Decode ....................................................... 36

Sound Field Effect ................................................... 36

Features of DSP Programs ...................................... 37

Table of Program Names for Each Input Format .... 40

TUNING ................................................................ 41

Automatic and Manual Tuning ................................ 41

Presetting Stations ................................................... 42

Tuning in to a Preset Station ................................... 44

Exchanging Preset Stations ..................................... 44

BASIC RECORDING .......................................... 45

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:04 PM1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are

trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc.

FEATURES

Built-in 8-Channel Power Amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.02% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

Main: 130 W + 130 W

Center: 130 W

Rear: 130 W + 130 W

Rear center: 130 W

(0.05% THD, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)

Front effect: 25 W + 25 W

Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX Decoder

◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/

24, DTS Neo: 6 Decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital

or DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner

◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

◆ Automatic Preset Tuning

◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset

Editing)

Other Features

◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter

◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 16 Items

for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video

System

◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance

Adjustment

◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other

Future Formats

◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing

Bass Response

◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in

Controlling This Unit

◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability

◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability

◆ Video Signal Conversion (S Video ↔ Composite

Video) Capability for Monitor Out

◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks

◆ Sleep Timer

◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes

and “Learning” Macro Capability

◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the

original signal

◆ Custom Installation Facility

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this

manual.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the purpose of the improvement

in operativity and others. In this case the product has priority.

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.8.21, 6:58 PM2

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

Installing Batteries in the Remote

Control

1 Open the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert three supplied batteries (LR6) in the

correct direction by aligning the + and –

marks on the batteries with the polarity

markings (+ and –) on the inside of the

battery compartment.

3 After new batteries are correctly inserted,

press the RESET button in the battery

compartment using a ball point pen or

similar object. (This does not clear the

contents of the memory.)

4 Replace the cover as pressing until it snaps

into place.

■ Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition

like; the operating range of the remote control

decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light

becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them

immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or

letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean

the battery compartment thoroughly before installing

new batteries.

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

(Australia model only)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A. model only)

Batteries (LR6) × 3

Remote control

GETTING STARTED

Checking the Package Contents

Check your package to make sure it has the following items.

Power Cord

(U.S.A. model only)

RESET button

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM3

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

1 2 34 5 6

r t y u8 9 0

asdp

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

2 INPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

3 (INPUT) MODE

Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,

DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is

connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see

page 31). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is

selected as the input source.

4 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

5 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

6 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

7 PHONES jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks or to the

speakers.

(There is an exception depending on the “1H SP B SET”

setting on the SET MENU.)

8 BASS EXTENSION

Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each

time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass

frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB

(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This

boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.

9 PROCESSOR DIRECT

Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at

each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS,

TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed,

eliminating any alteration of the original signal.

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM4

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

ATURAL SOUN

D AV REC

EIVER R

X-V3

300

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

0 SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its

corresponding button is pressed.

(Depending on the “1H SP B SET” setting on the SET

MENU, the output from each speaker varies when

SPEAKER B is set to on.)

q BASS

Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the low-frequency response.

w TREBLE

Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the high-frequency response.

Note

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and

right main speakers.

e REC OUT/ZONE 2

Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video

recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independent of the source

you are listening to or watching in the main room. When

set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source

is directed to all outputs.

r STEREO/EFFECT

Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.

When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are

directed to the main left and right speakers without effect

sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except

for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and

right speakers.

t A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).

y PROGRAM l / h

Selects the DSP program.

u 6CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

i PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:)

appears next to the band indication on the front panel

display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon

(:) does not appear.

o VIDEO AUX jacks

Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source.

p PRESET/TUNING EDIT

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the

colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset

station number and tuning.

This button is also used to exchange the assignment of

two preset stations with each other.

a FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

s MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

d TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.

To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so

that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel

display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this

button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up.

■ Opening and closing the front

panel door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. When you are not using them, close the door.

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM5

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

Remote Control

This section describes the controls and their functions of

the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL

FEATURES” on pages 46 to 59 for operating other

components with this remote control.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 RE-NAME

Used for changing the input source name in the display

window (see page 49).

3 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

4 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

5 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

6 Display window

Shows the selected source component that you are

controlling.

7 SOURCE SELECT k/n

Selects the another component to control independently

from the input that has been selected by pressing an input

selector button.

8 LIGHT

Turn the light on or off. When you press this button once,

the light turns on for about ten seconds. Press again to

turn off the light.

9 10KEY/DSP

Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode.

0 Operation buttons

Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for

operating your other components selected by the input

selector buttons.

q EX/ES

Turns on or off the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder

with 10 KEY/DSP set to the DSP position.

w LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets

the level.

e ON SCREEN

Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video

monitor.

r SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

t TEST

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

y CLEAR

Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn

and rename features, and set manufacturer codes (see

pages 52 and 53).

u LEARN

Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for

programming the functions of other remote controls (see

pages 47 to 49).

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM6

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

30°30°

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

i MACRO

Used to program a series of operations for control by a

single button (see pages 51 and 52).

o MACRO ON/OFF

Turns the macro function on and off.

p Å and ı

Switch the control area for the extra components that are

not connected to this unit without changing the input.

a Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

s 6CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

d DSP program/Numeric buttons

Select DSP programs or numbers according to the

position of 10KEY/DSP.

f MUTE

Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the

MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio

output to the previous volume level.

g VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

h STEREO/EFFECT

Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction.

When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are

directed to the main left and right speakers without effect

sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except

for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and

right speakers.

j PARAMETER/SET MENU

Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode.

k Cursor buttons k/n/–/+

Select and adjust DSP program parameters and SET

MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/

SET MENU.

l Cover

Slides down to use the various setup buttons. Slides up

when these buttons are not being used.

Using the Remote Control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM7

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

LCR

RC RR

LFE

VIRTUAL

DTS

Neo

MOVIE TV THEATER

ENTERTAINMENT12

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO

LOGIC

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

MATRIXDISCRETE

PCM

SILENT

96/24

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

STEREO

TUNED

MEMORY

P. DIRECT

BASS

MUTE VOLUME

SLEEP

AUTO

24bit

PRO LOGIC

qw t yuio p sa

145687 90

e r

DSP

indicator

Lights up when you select a digital sound field program.

2 Decoder indicators

When any of the decoders equipped on this unit

functions, the indicator lights up.

3 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP (see page

34).

4 Input source indicator

Shows the current input source with a cursor.

5 AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

6 BASS indicator

Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on.

7 SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

8 MUTE indicator

Lights up while the MUTE function is on.

9 96/24 indicator

Lights up when the DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

0 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

PCM

indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

w SILENT indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound

effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 34).

e SP A B indicator

Lights up according to which set of main speakers is

selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of

speakers are selected.

Front Panel Display

r Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

t DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program lights up when

the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE

THEATER 2, TV THEATER or V/DTS SURROUND

DSP program is selected.

y Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

u STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

i TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.

o MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored.

p P. DIRECT

Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on.

a Input channel indicator

Indicates the channel components of input signals being

received.

LFE

indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM8

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

CONTROL

OUT

SPEAKERS

TUNER

REMOTE

75Ω

UNBAL.

OUT

RC-232C

ANT

GND

FM ANT

+12V

15mA

MAX.

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/SAT

MAIN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2 OUT

REAR CENTER

(SURROUND)

CENTER

FRONT

REAR

EFFECT

PRE OUT/MAIN IN

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SELECTEUR D'INPEDANCE

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

REAR

FRONT EFFECT

REAR CENTER

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

VCR 1

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

(SURROUND)

COAXIAL

–

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

A + B

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

9 0rq

w e

(U.S.A. model)

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

2 Audio component jacks

See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 15 to 17 for connection information.

4 RS-232C

These are control expansion terminals for commercial

use. Consult your dealer for details.

5 Speaker terminals

See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.

6 AC OUTLETS

Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V

components (see page 22).

7 AC INLET (U.S.A. model only)

Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see

page 22).

8 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

9 6CH INPUT jacks

See page 21 for connection information.

0 ZONE 2 OUT jacks

See page 75 for details.

q Antenna input terminals

See page 20 for connection information.

w REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

See page 75 for details.

CONTROL OUT jacks

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.

e PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks

See page 21 for connection information.

r IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your

speaker impedance (see page 14). Set this unit in the

standby mode before you change the setting of this

switch.

Rear Panel

0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM9

SPEAKER SETUP

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with an 8-speaker system, using left and right

main speakers, left and right rear speakers, left and right

front effect speakers and a center and rear center

speakers. If you use different brands of speakers (with

different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a

moving human voice and other types of sound may not

shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers

from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same

tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center

speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The

front effect speakers are used for the effect sound. If for

some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you

can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with

the full system.

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For

precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the

models of equivalent performance with the main

speakers.

PREPARATION

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.

The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

CAUTION

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with a monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

Speakers to Be Used

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM10

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

■ Rear center speaker

Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left

and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor

as the rear speakers.

■ Front effect speakers

Place the front effect speakers about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 feet)

outside the main speakers and in front of the room, facing

slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor.

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall

reflections.

■ Main speakers

Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the

same.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the

monitor and centrally between the main speakers.

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the

floor.

Speaker Placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers.

Main speaker (L)

1.8 m (6 feet)

Rear speaker (L)

Rear center speaker

Rear speaker (R)

Subwoofer

Main speaker (R)

Center speaker

Front effect speaker (R)

Front effect speaker (L)

Note

• If you do not use any effect speakers (rear, front effect, center and/or rear center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items in the

SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers to.

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM11

SPEAKER SETUP

Connecting the Speakers

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage this unit and/or speakers.

If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers

in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.

■ Speaker cables

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One of the cables is colored or

shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of

the corresponding terminal.

10 mm (3/8”)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM12

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

CONTROL

OUT

SPEAKERS

TUNER

REMOTE

75Ω

UNBAL.

OUT

RS-232C

ANT

GND

FM ANT

+12V

15mA

MAX.

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/SAT

MAIN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE 2 OUT

REAR CENTER

(SURROUND)

CENTER

FRONT

REAR

EFFECT

PRE OUT/MAIN IN

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SELECTEUR D'INPEDANCE

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

REAR

FRONT EFFECT

REAR CENTER

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

VCR 1

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

(SURROUND)

COAXIAL

–

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

A + B

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

Subwoofer

system

Rear Center

speaker

Rear speaker

Center

speaker

(U.S.A. model)

Right

Right Left

Front Effect speaker

Right Left

Left

Main B speaker

■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either

of the MAIN A or B terminals.

■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

■ FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS terminals

A front effect speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or

rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The

LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are

assigned to this jack.

Note

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from

the SUBWOOFER jack.

Right Left

Main A speaker

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM13

SPEAKER SETUP

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

MAIN

(SURROUND)

CENTER

FRONT

REAR

EFFECT

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SELECTEUR D'INPEDANCE

SET BEFORE POWER ON

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

A + B

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SELECTEUR D'INPEDANCE

SET BEFORE POWER ON

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

A + B

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

Switch

position

Upper

Lower

Speaker

Zone 2

Front

Effect

Rear

Center

Rear

Center

Main

Zone 2

Front

Effect

Rear

Center

Rear

Center

Main

Impedance level

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

[Australia model]

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 4 Ω or higher.

[Australia model]

The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.

[U.S.A. model]

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit

may be damaged.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the

standby mode.

Select the upper or lower position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this

switch only when this unit is in the standby mode.

(U.S.A. model)

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.8.21, 6:59 PM14

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

• The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can be converted

to composite signals inside of this unit and output through the

VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks on this unit as well.

• The signals input through the VIDEO jack on this unit can be

output through the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack by setting

“V CONV.” in “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU to ON

(see page 70).

• When signals input through both S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks,

signals input through the S VIDEO jack has priority.

• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A

and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O

ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 67 for details).

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front

panel)

These jacks are used to connect any video input source

such as a game console and a camcorder to this unit.

Before Connecting Components

CAUTION

Never connect this unit and other components to mains

power until all connections between components have

been completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to

say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to

“–”. Some components require different connection

methods and have different jack names. Refer to the

operation instructions for each component to be

connected to this unit.

• Use commercially available video pin cables when

connecting to the S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks.

Connecting Video Components

■ About the video jacks

There are three types of video jacks.

VIDEO jacks transmit composite

signals.

S VIDEO jacks transmit S-video

signals.

S-video signals are separated into

luminance (Y) and color (C) video

signals to achieve high-quality

color reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

transmit component signals.

Component signals are separated

into luminance (Y) and color

difference (P

B, PR) to provide the

best quality in picture

reproduction.

The signal input through these jacks are output through

the MONITOR OUT jacks of the same type.

Make sure to connect the correct jacks of the same type

on your video component and the video monitor.

CONNECTIONS

VIDEO jack

S VIDEO jack

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

VIDEO AUX

S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

AUDIO OUT R

AUDIO OUT L

VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL OUT

S VIDEO OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR PB Y

VIDEO

S VIDEO

Game

console or

video camera

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 7/26/02, 5:46 PM15

CONNECTIONS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

CONTROL

OUT

TUNER

REMOTE

75Ω

UNBAL.

OUT

RS-232C

ANT

GND

FM ANT

+12V

15mA

MAX.

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/SAT

MAIN

OUT

PRE OUT/MAI

SUB

WOOFER

REAR

FRONT EFFE

REAR CENTER

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

VCR 1

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

(SURROUND)

COAXIAL

L R

VVC

S S

L R

COMPONENT

INPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

COAXIAL OUTPUT

OPTICAL OUTPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

COMPONENT OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

V V V

VVV

(U.S.A. model)

indicates S-video cables

indicates video cables

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates left analog cables

indicates signal direction

TV/digital TV or

LD player

DVD player

Video

monitor

indicates component video cables

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM16

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

CONTROL

OUT

TUNER

REMOTE

75Ω

UNBAL.

OUT

RS-232C

ANT

GND

FM ANT

+12V

15mA

MAX.

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/SAT

MAIN

OUT

PRE OUT/MAI

SUB

WOOFER

REAR

FRONT EFFE

REAR CENTER

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

VCR 1

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

(SURROUND)

COAXIAL

L R

S S S

L R L R

S VIDEO OUTPUTVIDEO OUTPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

OPTICAL OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

AUDIO INPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

COMPONENT OUTPUT

V V V

VVV

COMPONENT

INPUT

indicates S-video cables

indicates video pin cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right audio pin cables

indicates left audio pin cables

indicates signal direction

Video

monitor

VCR 1 or VCR 2/

DVR (digital

video recorder)

Cable TV or

Satellite tuner

(U.S.A. model)

indicates component video cables

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM17

CONNECTIONS

Connecting Audio Components

■ Connecting a CD player

• The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a

CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks.

• When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and

OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from

the COAXIAL CD jack.

■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape

deck or CD recorder

• DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) are

independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL

OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks.

• When you connect your recording component to both the

analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given

to the digital signal.

Note

• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its

power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may

distort the sound from other components.

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to

both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given

to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

• You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to

your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET

MENU (see page 67 for details).

About the dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect

the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you

are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back

in place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

Notes

• DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) jacks are

independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL

OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks.

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard, this unit may not function properly.

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. However you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some record players.

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM18

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

6CH INPUT

GND

AUDIO

OPTICAL

TAPE

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL

/SAT

PHONO

MAIN

SURROUND

D-TV

/LD

COAXIAL

L R L R

L R

L R L RL R

OPTICAL INPUT

OPTICAL OUTPUT

INPUT

OUTPUT

OPTICAL INPUT

OUTPUT

GND

MAIN OUTPUT

SURROUND

OUTPUT

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

CENTER OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

COAXIAL OUTPUT

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates left analog cables

indicates signal direction

CD player

CD recorder

MD recorder or

tape deck

External decoder

See page 21

Turntable

(U.S.A. model)

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM19

CONNECTIONS

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

+12

15m

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

CBL

/SAT

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and

GND terminals.

3 Release the tab to fix the lead wires.

• The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and

attached to a wall, etc.

• Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA

dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.

Connecting the Antennas

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal

strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

■ Connecting the indoor FM

antenna

Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω

UNBAL. FM ANT terminal.

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM loop antenna

(included)

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM20

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

Connecting to an External

Amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks as follows.

Notes

• When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT/MAIN

IN jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary

to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume

of the amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• No signals will be output from any other PRE OUT jacks than

the MAIN jacks when SPEAKER A is turned off with ZONE B

selected for “1H SP B SET” on the SET MENU.

1 FRONT EFFECT jacks

Front effect channel line output jacks.

2 REAR (SURROUND) jacks

Rear channel line output jacks.

3 SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system

to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main,

center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they

are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this

jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals

generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also

directed if they are assigned to this jack.

Notes

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by

using the remote control of this unit (see “ADJUSTING THE

LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 73).

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE

LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output

from the SUBWOOFER jack.

Connecting to the 6CH INPUT

Jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left

and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND

and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from

an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When 6CH INPUT is selected, the signals input to the 6CH

INPUT jacks have priority over any other input source.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of

“1 SPEAKER SET (1A to 1E)” on the SET MENU do not

apply.

• When headphones are used, only main L/R channels are

output. The setting for “6CH INPUT SET” on the SET MENU

will not be applied.

• Setting for “15 6CH INPUT SET” on the SET MENU will be

applied when 6CH INPUT is selected.

MAIN

OUT

PRE OUT/MAIN IN

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER

REAR

FRONT EFFECT

REAR CENTER

(SURROUND)

4 REAR CENTER jack

Rear center channel line output jack.

5 MAIN jacks

IN: Line input to this unit’s main channel amplifiers.

When connecting to these jacks, signals input to the

preamplifier of this unit will not be output from the main

amplifier of this unit.

OUT: Main channel line output jacks.

Note

• The signals output through these jacks are affected by the

BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION settings.

6 CENTER jack

Center channel line output jack.

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM21

CONNECTIONS

Connecting the Power Supply Cords

■ Connecting the AC power cord

[U.S.A. model]

Plug the power cord into the AC inlet when all

connections are complete, and then plug in this unit to the

wall outlet.

Caution

• Do not use other AC power cords than the one provided.

Otherwise it may result in causing fire or an electrical

shock.

[Australia model]

Plug this unit into the wall outlet.

Plug in the other components connected to this unit to the

wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.S.A. model ................................................ 2 OUTLETS

Australia model .............................................. 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets

will supply power to any connected component whenever

this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W.

(U.S.A. model)

AC OUTLETS

AC IN

ECTOR

DANCE

ER ON

IN./

SPEAKER

IN./

SPEAKER

IN./

SPEAKER

IN./

SPEAKER

IN./

SPEAKER

IN./

SPEAKER

ZONE 2 OUT

MAIN A OR B

CENTER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

6ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

4ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

FRONT

REAR

REAR CENTER

A + B

8ΩMIN./

SPEAKER

To AC outlet

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM22

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

Turning on the Power

When all connections are completed, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Remote control

Front panel

0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM23

Selecting the OSD Mode

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control

repeatedly to change the display mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order: full

display, short display, and display off.

If the video monitor is connected to the

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this

unit, the OSD can be shown only when operating the

SET MENU. However, the OSD cannot be

superimposed over the image.

Notes

• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or

video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.

• The OSD signal output to the COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR OUT jacks is created from the composite or S-

video signal. Therefore, the quality of the OSD signal may vary

depending on the signal input through the VIDEO or S VIDEO

jacks.

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

≥ DSP LEVEL…………0dB

INIT.DLY…………30ms

ROOM SIZE…………1.O

LIVENESS…………………5

Europe Hall A

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

PARAMETER

SET MENU

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)

You can display the operation information for this unit on

a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP

program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier

to see the available options and parameters than it is by

reading this information on the front panel display.

• If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is

superimposed over the image.

• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will

not be recorded with any video signal.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when

a video source is not being reproduced (or the source

component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the

SET MENU (see page 70).

OSD Modes

You can change the amount of information the OSD

shows.

Full display

This mode always shows the DSP program parameter

settings on the video monitor.

Short display

This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front

panel display at the bottom of the screen and then

disappears.

Display off

This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at

the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards,

no changes to operations appear on the monitor except

those of the ON SCREEN button.

Full display Short display

• When you choose the full display mode, INPUT, VOLUME

and some other types of operation information are displayed at

the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front

panel display.

• The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the

OSD mode.

0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM24

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Item

1A CENTER SP

1B MAIN SP

1C REAR L/R SP

1D REAR CT SP

1E LFE/BASS OUT

1F FRONT EFCT SP

1G MAIN LEVEL

1H SP B SET

Description

Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is

being used and its performance.

Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main

speakers.

Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers

are being used and their performance.

Selects the output mode according to whether or not a rear center

speaker is being used and its performance.

Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass

signal.

Selects the output mode according to whether or not front effect

speakers are being used.

Selects the main speaker level.

Select the location of the main speakers to be connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Control value (default

setting indicated in bold)

LRG/SML/NONE

LARGE/SMALL

LRG/SML/NONE

SWFR/MAIN/BOTH

YES/NONE

Normal/–10 dB

MAIN / ZONE B

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS

This unit has 8 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your

configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings

as well as other possible settings.

If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change settings

following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from pages 61 to 64.

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1H

0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 7/26/02, 5:47 PM25

3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the

front panel to the center position and turn off

BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR

DIRECT by pressing the buttons.

“BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear

on the front panel display.

4 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU on the remote

control to PARAMETER.

TEST DOLBY SUR.

Select “TEST DOLBY SUR.” to match the output levels

of the center, rear center and left and right rear speakers

to the left and right main speakers.

1 Press TEST to output the

test tone.

2 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test

tone.

This section explains how to adjust the speaker output

levels by using the test tone generator. The “TEST

DOLBY SUR.” is for balancing the output levels of the

six speakers required for surround sound systems. The

“TEST DSP” is for balancing the front effect speakers

with the main speakers for the DSP sound field programs.

When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at

the listening position will be the same from each speaker.

This is important for the best performance of the digital

sound field processor, and various decoders (Dolby

Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic

, DTS, DTS

ES, and DTS Neo: 6).

The adjustment of each speaker output level should be

made at your listening position with the remote control.

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from

the PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Before You Begin

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of the

main speakers, press both A

and B.

TEST

BASS

TREBLE

–

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

31, 4

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

SPEAKERS

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

Set to OFF.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

PARAMETER

SET MENU

VOLUME

0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM26

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONSADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

Notes

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

center channel sound is automatically output from the left and

right main speakers.

• If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be

adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order

of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→SUBWOOFER→LEFT...,

skipping the rear right and left speakers and the rear center

speaker.

• If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

output level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in

step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order of

LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT

SURROUND→SUBWOOFER→LEFT ..., skipping the rear

center speaker.

• If “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN,

the output level of the subwoofer cannot be adjusted. The test

tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→

RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→REAR CENTER→LEFT

SURROUND→LEFT…, skipping the subwoofer.

• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as

long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening

to or watching the input source with the desired volume by

adjusting the volume key.

• You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers

(center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the

output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main

speakers even after you have increased the output level of these

speakers up to +10 dB, set “1G MAIN LEVEL” on the SET

MENU to –10 dB (see page 64). This setting decreases the

main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal

level. After you have set “1G MAIN LEVEL” on the SET

MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear

speakers again.

The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,

center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker,

rear center speaker, left rear speaker and subwoofer

in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each

time.

The state of the test tone output is also shown on the

monitor by an image of the audio listening room.

This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

Front panel display also indicates from which

speaker the test tone is output in the order of

TEST LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→

TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR.

→TEST SUBWOOFER

Note

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this

unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.

3 Press –/+ repeatedly to

adjust the output level of

the effect speakers so that

the output level coming

from each speaker is the

same.

While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the

selected speaker.

Note

• Main L/R speaker level cannot be adjusted by itself. Use

VOLUME to adjust the main volume.

4 When the adjustment is

complete, press TEST.

To enter the “TEST DSP”

mode, press TEST once.

To stop the test tone, press

TEST twice.

LEFT

TEST DOLBY SUR.

LEFT SURROUND RIGHT SURROUND

CENTER

REAR CENTER

RIGHT LEFT

SUBWOOFER

TEST

0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM27

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

TEST DSP

Select “TEST DSP” to match the output levels of the

front effect speakers to the main speakers.

Note

• You cannot enter the “TEST DSP” mode if “1F FRONT EFCT

SP” is set to NONE.

1 Press TEST repeatedly to

output the test tone.

2 Adjust the volume so you

can hear the test tone.

The test tone is heard alternately from the front effect

speakers and main speakers. The tone is produced for

2.5 seconds each time. Press k to hear the test tone

from the front effect L speaker, and n to hear the test

tone from the front effect R speaker.

TEST

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

31, 4

VOLUME

RIGHT

FRONT

LEFT

FRONT

The state of the test tone output is also shown on the

monitor by an image of the audio listening room.

This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

Front panel display also indicates from which

speaker the test tone is output as follows:

TEST MAIN → TEST FRONT → TEST MAIN → …

Note

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this

unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.

3 Press –/+ repeatedly to

adjust the output level of

the front effect speakers

so that the output level

coming from each

speaker is the same.

While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the front

effect speaker.

Note

• Main L/R speaker level cannot be adjusted by itself. Use

VOLUME to adjust the main volume.

4 When the adjustment is

complete, press TEST to

stop the test tone.

• It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as

long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening

to or watching the input source with the desired volume by

adjusting the volume key.

• You can increase the output levels of the front effect speakers

to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than

that of the main speakers even after you have increased the

output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1G MAIN

LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 64). This

setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-

third of the normal level. After you have set “1G MAIN

LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for

the center and rear speakers again.

MAIN

TEST DSP

TEST

0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM28

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of

main speakers, press both A

and B. The speaker indicator(s)

for the selected set(s) lights up

on the front panel display.

4 Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input

selector buttons on the remote control) to

select the input source.

The current input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display and on the video

monitor for a few seconds.

Note

• The input source names correspond to the jack names on the

rear panel of this unit, not the names of the component

connected to this unit.

To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks

Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display and on the video monitor.

Notes

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on

the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector

buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the

front panel display and the video monitor.

• If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press 6CH INPUT.

INPUT

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

7 4

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

SPEAKERS

Remote control

Front panel

Selected input source

6CH

INPUT

6CH INPUT

Remote controlFront panel

0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM29

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to combine a video image

from a video source with a sound from an audio source.

For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music

while having beautiful scenery from the video source on

the video monitor.

Select a source from the video group and then select a

source from the audio group with the input selector

buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV

cannot be made with INPUT on the front panel.

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To resume the audio output,

press MUTE again.

• You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as

VOLUME +/–.

• During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front

panel display.

• When this unit enters the standby mode, the mute function will

be cancelled.

■ When you have finished using

this unit

Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the

remote control) to set this unit in the

standby mode.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

Note

• If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded

signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may

be disturbed due to those signals.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS

EXTENSION. These controls are only effective for

sound from the main speakers.

Notes

• If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR

OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the

reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be

lowered for the characteristics of AV receivers. In this case,

turn on the component.

• BASS EXTENSION may not be effective if “1B MAIN SP” on

the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is

set to SWFR.

7 Select a DSP program if desired.

Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on

the remote control) to select a DSP program. See

pages 35 to 39 for details about the DSP program.

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

VOLUME

BASS

TREBLE

–

BASS

EXTENSION

Front panel

Remote control

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

Front panel

Remote control

MUTE

PROGRAM

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

Front panel Remote control

0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM30

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

Input Modes and Indications

This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the

priority of the input signal among different types of input

signals.

When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode

is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU

(see page 68 for details).

Press (INPUT) MODE (the input selector

button that you have pressed to select the

input source on the remote control)

repeatedly until the desired input mode is

shown on the front panel display and on the

video monitor.

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is

automatically selected in the following

order:

1) Digital signal

2) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal

encoded with DTS is selected even if

another signal is input at the same time.

ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is

selected even if a digital signal is input at

the same time.

Notes

• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack

has precedence over the OPTICAL jack.

• In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on

some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a

moment when playback resumes after a search because the

digital signal is selected again.

• When playing the LD source that has not been digitally

recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In

this case, set the input mode to ANALOG.

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

setting.

• When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set

according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page

68 for details).

MODE

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

DVD AUTO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

Remote controlFront panel

Input mode

■ Notes on the digital signal

The digital input jacks of this unit can handle up to a

96 kHz sampling digital signal. However when inputting

a higher digital signal than 48 kHz, be aware of the

following points.

• Sound effect will be added to the signals after converting the

sampling frequency to 48 kHz or below.

• When the sound effect is turned off by pressing STEREO/

EFFECT, this unit reproduces sound in 2-channel stereo at the

sampling frequency of the input signal.

■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, you may not be able to perform

DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection

between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces

the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you

want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the

source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to

AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit

reproduces no sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with

the input mode set to AUTO;

– This unit automatically switches to the DTS-

decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.)

after having detected the DTS signal. When playback

of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator

may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS

source can be played. If you want to play a normal

PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.

– The “t” indicator may flash when a search or

skip operation is performed while the DTS source is

playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If

this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this

unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”

mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”

indicator will turn off.

0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM31

BASIC PLAYBACK

Selecting a Sound Field Program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. There are 11 programs with sub-programs

available with this unit. However the selection depends on

the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are

possible for all input signal formats. For details about

each program, see pages 35 to 39.

1 Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP on

the remote control.

2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the DSP

program buttons on the remote control) to

select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears on the

front panel display and on the video monitor.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

DSP

10KEY

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

HALL 1

EX/ES

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

2,31

3 After selecting the desired program, press

the same button repeatedly to select the

desired sub-program if available.

For example, to select the sub-program “70 mm

Sci-Fi”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly.

Notes

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically

selected when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode

is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 9–11) automatically

switches to the appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Movie, or

Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers

and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center

speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main

speakers.

• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit

is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.

• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and

not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening

room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections

in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.

■ DTS 96/24

• Select DTS DIGITAL SUR/Normal among CINEMA

DSP programs or press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off

the sound effect in order to decode the DTS 96/24

signal. DTS 96/24 decoder does not function in other

cases.

• When the sound effect is turned off by pressing

STEREO/EFFECT, this unit plays the DTS 96/24

signal in 2-channel stereo at the sampling frequency

96 kHz.

• Press EX/ES for matrix 6.1 playback. However, the

DTS 96/24 decoder does not function during matrix

6.1 playback.

•

96KHz

24bit

indicator lights up while the DTS 96/24

decoder functions.

MOVIE THEATER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

PRO LOGIC

70mm Sci-Fi

PROGRAM

Sub-program name

Program name

Front panel

Remote control

MOVIE THEATER

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

24Bit

PRO LOGIC

70mm Spectacle

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

Program name

Sub-program name

DSP

10KEY

0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM32

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

4 Select a subprogram suitable for the source.

The selection switches as follows each time V/DTS

SUR. is pressed.

• When PRO LOGIC is selected

Normal ↔ Enhanced

• When PRO LOGIC

is selected

Movie↔ Music

• When Neo: 6 is selected

Cinema ↔ Music

■ Playing the Dolby Digital EX or

DTS ES software

Press EX/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES

decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES

software with a rear center speaker.

Press EX/ES to select the mode. (The modes that can be

selected vary depending on the format of the software to

play.)

AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby

Digital EX/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES

Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the

input source that this unit can detect. If the

input source has no signal (flag) that this

unit can detect (“AUTO:OFF” is displayed.),

press EX/ES to select “Matrix 6.1”.

Discrete 6.1: This mode can be selected only when the

source with DTS ES Discrete format has

been detected. (The DISCRETE indicator

lights up.) If the source switches to other

sources with rear left and right channels

during playback, this unit reproduces those

sources through the Matrix decoder. (Either

or MATRIX indicator lights up.)

Matrix 6.1: This mode makes 6-channel playback of the

input source with Matrix or Matrix

compatible format through the Matrix 6.1

decoder. (Either

or MATRIX

indicator lights up.)

OFF: The Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder

does not work in this mode.

Selecting PRO LOGIC,

PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6

You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or

six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO

LOGIC

or Neo: 6 in the program No. 11.

1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback

on the source component.

2 (Operating using the front panel)

Select a decoder and subprogram.

Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel

repeatedly to select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC

, or Neo: 6.

(Operating using the remote control)

Press V/DTS SUR. on the remote control.

The previously selected sub program appears on the

front panel display.

3 Select a decoder.

Press SELECT to select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC

or Neo: 6.

PRO

LOGIC

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

PRO LOGIC

DOLBY

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

Remote control

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

2,4

PROGRAM

Front panel

EX/ES

CHP/INDEX

LCR

RC RR

LFE

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

Matrix 6.1

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

100

11 12

234

(Example: when playing the Dolby Digital EX software)

0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:05 PM33

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Normal Stereo Reproduction

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound

effect for normal stereo reproduction.

Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound

effect back on.

Notes

• If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to “SMALL” and

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”, or “1E LFE/BASS

OUT” is set to “BOTH”, the LFE signals will be output from

the subwoofer.

• If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is

automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear

speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU

to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.

■ Displaying the information about

the input source

During the stereo reproduction, you can display the

information such as the type, format and sampling

frequency of the signal input from the component

connected to this unit.

(During playback)

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to PARAMETER.

2 Press k/n to display the information about

the input signal.

Notes

• The DTS 96/24 decoder and the DTS ES decoder cannot be

activated at the same time while playing the DTS 96/24 signal.

When “AUTO” is selected, the DTS 96/24 decoder has

precedence over the DTS ES decoder.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed

in the following cases:

– When “1C REAR L/R SP”is set to “NONE”.

– When the sound effect is turned off.

– When the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack is

being played.

– When the source being played does not contain rear L/R

channel signals.

– When Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When headphones are connected.

– When “8ch Stereo” is selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode

will be reset to AUTO.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the

DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual

speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP

program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET

MENU to NONE.

Notes

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases:

– when the 8ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic

Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is

selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

• When over 48 kHz sampling digital signal is being input, this

unit reproduces sound in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode after

converting the sampling frequency to 48 kHz or below.

■ SILENT CINEMA DSP

You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were

actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can

listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your

headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound

field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the

headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the

front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to

the source with normal stereo reproduction.)

Notes

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, this unit is

not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode even if the sound

effect is on.

• When over 48 kHz sampling digital signal is being input, this

unit reproduces sound in the CINEMA DSP mode after

converting the sampling frequency to 48 kHz or below.

STEREO

EFFECT

STEREO

EFFECT

Front panel

Remote control

PARAMETER

SET MENU

PARAMETER

SET MENU

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 7/26/02, 5:49 PM34

BASIC

OPERATION

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Understanding Sound Fields

A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a

particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear

early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound

produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and

other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives

each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.

YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to

measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music

venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the

direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then

we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this

unit.

Hi-Fi DSP Programs

Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your

listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound

field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.

The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the

virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener.

CINEMA-DSP

Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread

even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with

the images on the screen.

CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP

integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field

programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In

CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and

Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,

and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.

When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the

most suitable sound field program for that signal.

L SURROUND SOUND FIELD

R SURROUND SOUND FIELD

PRESENCE SOUND FIELD

DIALOG

EFFECT MUSIC

0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM35

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Sound Field Effect

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a

dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or

DTS technology.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround and right surround channels. This processing

enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field

and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-

equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear

separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect

These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center

DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and

surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround

matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks.

These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic

decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs for 2-channel

sources are designed to recreate the spaciousness and

delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the

encoding and decoding processes.

■ Dolby Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6

Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five or

six full range channels. They also provide two modes; MOVIE/CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel sources.

Surround DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Straight Decode

This unit is equipped with various precise decoders;

• Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel reproduction of the original sound

• Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES decoder for an additional rear center channel

• DTS 96/24 decoder for the high quality playback of the DTS 96/24 signal at the sampling frequency 96 kHz.

• Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo:6 decoder for multi-channel reproduction of 2-channel sources

Select any of the STRAIGHT DECODE modes in Program 11 (except for the sub-program “Enhanced.”) to use any of

these decoders for reproducing the original sound without any sound effects added. In this case, no DSP effect is applied

and the DSP indicator turns off.

0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM36

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Features of DSP Programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

No.

Program

CONCERT HALL 1

CONCERT HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

Features

This is a large fan-shaped concert hall in Munich

which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the

whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively

little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads

finely and beautifully.

This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with less

than 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This hall has a

very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual

seat is in the center-right section on the first floor.

This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United

States which features a fairly traditional European

design. The interior is relatively simple, in the

American style. The middle and high frequencies are

richly and beautifully reinforced.

A large round concert hall with a rich surround

effect. Prounced reflections from all directions

emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field

has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is

near the center, close to the stage.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of

a big church with a high dome and columns along

each side. The reverberation delay is very long while

the early reflections are smaller than with other

sound field programs.

This program features the sound field created by the

refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval

Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the

outskirts of Paris.

This is the sound field at a jazz club in New York. It

is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor

area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of

the hall.

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom

Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can

seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field

offering a real and vibrant sound.

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music.

The data for this program was recorded at LA’s

“hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at

the center-left of the hall.

A classic shoe-box type concert hall. This program

gives you long delays between direct sounds and

effect sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel

of a large arena.

Type of

sources

For music

sources

Sub program

Europe Hall A

Europe Hall B

U.S.A. Hall C

Live Concert

Freiburg

Royaumont

Village Gate

The Bottom

Line

The Roxy

Theatre

Arena

Mode

Hi-Fi DSP

0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM37

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

No.

Program

ENTERTAINMENT

MUSIC VIDEO

TV THEATER

MOVIE

THEATER 1

Features

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a

lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is

dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized

by a high-energy, “immediate” sound.

Using this program increases the listening position

range. This is a sound field suitable for background

music at parties.

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video

game sounds.

This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere

and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock

concert.

This program provides excellent vocal depth and

overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation.

The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it

reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from

a concert hall.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural

video sources (such as old movies). The program

produces the optimum reverberation to create sound

depth using only the presence sound field.

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow,

the surround sound field employs the sound

environment of a large concert hall. With this

program, you can enjoy watching various TV

programs such as news, variety shows, music

programs or sports programs.

This program creates the extremely wide sound field

of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the

source sound in detail, making both the video and the

sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind

of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby

Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie

productions).

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound form of science fiction

films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic

space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction

films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded

software employing the most advanced techniques.

Type of

sources

For music

sources

For audio-

video

sources

For movie

programs

Sub program

Disco

8ch Stereo

Game

Pop/Rock

Opera

Mono Movie

Variety/Sports

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Mode

Hi-Fi DSP

CINEMA DSP

0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM38

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

No.

Program

MOVIE

THEATER 2

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR

PRO LOGIC

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS DIGITAL

SUR

PRO LOGIC

DTS Neo:6

Features

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the

sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel

soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be

similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the

reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained

as much as possible.

This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm

and multichannel soundtrack films, and is

characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The

presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially

spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining

the echo effect of conversations without losing

clarity.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround

speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby

Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS

decoding and digital sound field processing create

precise effects without altering the original sound

orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field

wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the

left and right, and toward the screen.

The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and

sound effects from sources. The highly efficient

decoding process improves crosstalk and channel

separation and makes sound positioning smoother

and more precise.

In this program, no DSP effect is applied.

To reproduce 2 channel sources decoding into

multichannels in each decoding mode.

Type of

sources

For movie

programs

Sub program

Adventure

General

Enhanced

Normal

Movie

Music

Cinema

Music

Mode

CINEMA DSP

STRAIGHT DECODE

0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM39

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Table of Program Names for Each Input Format

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

DOLBY

DIGITAL

DTS DGTL

SUR

PRO LOGIC

DTS Neo: 6

2 channel

Stereo

70 mm Spectacle

70 mm Sci-Fi

70 mm Adventure

70 mm General

—

Normal

Enhanced

Movie

Music

Cinema

Music

DOLBY DIGITAL

EX decoder:

inactive (off)

DGTL Spectacle

DGTL Sci-Fi

DGTL Adventure

DGTL General

Normal

Enhanced

—

DOLBY DIGITAL

EX decoder:

active (on)

Spectacle EX

Sci-Fi EX

Adventure EX

General EX

Dolby D EX

EX Enhanced

—

DTS ES

decoder:

active (on)

Spectacle ES

Sci-Fi ES

Adventure ES

General ES

—

Matrix

6.1

ES Dscrt 6.1

Enhanced ES

—

DTS ES

decoder:

inactive (off)

DTS Spectacle

DTS Sci-Fi

DTS Adventure

DTS General

—

Normal

96/24 Normal*

Enhanced

—

*1 means the DTS ES Matrix decoder is active.

*2 means the DTS ES Discrete decoder is active.

*3 means the DTS 96/24 decoder is active.

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically

switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the EX/ES button on the

remote control, the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be

selected.

• EX/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the

program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.

• When playing 6.1 channel source with EX/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for

5.1 channel.

Note

• The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 11 except for the Enhanced mode.

DOLBY DIGITAL DTSInput

Program

No.

0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM40

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l

to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the same button

again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired

station.

When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown on the front panel display.

• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not

stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune in to it manually.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 described in

“Automatic tuning” on left.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from

the front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display

next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING

(EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue the tuning search.

Note

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change

the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

Automatic and Manual Tuning

There are 2 ways of tuning; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate INPUT (press TUNER on the remote

control) to select TUNER as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display

next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING

(EDIT) to turn it off.

INPUT

PRESET/

TUNING

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

Front panel Remote control

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Goes off

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET/

TUNING

CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

AUTO

A~~AM~1404

CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

AUTO

A~~AM~1404

CR DVD TUNER CDCD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

AUTO

A~~AM~1404

TUNING

Lights up

0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM41

TUNING

Presetting Stations

■ Automatically presetting stations

(for FM stations)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those

stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in

to any preset station by selecting the preset station

number (see page 44).

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”

indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds,

automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency

currently displayed toward the higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

MEMORY

MUTE VOLUME

SLEEP

AUTO

A1:FM 87.5 MHz

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

Lights up

• When a station data is stored under a preset number, the

frequency and reception band are also stored.

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or

AM station by simply following the procedure in the section

“Exchanging Preset Stations” on page 44.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually

in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure

in “Manually presetting stations” on page 43.

■ Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit

will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

1. Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatically presetting

stations” on left.

2. After pressing MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for

about 3 seconds, press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/

TUNING l / h to select the preset number under

which the first station will be stored.

Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have

all been stored up to E8.

3. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

FM/AM

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM42

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5

groups) manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 41 for tuning instructions.

When tuned in to a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of received station.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about

5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears and make sure that the

colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to

the band indication.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

43 2,5

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is

flashing.

The station band and frequency

appear on the front panel

display with the preset group

and number you have selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

MUTE VOLUME

SLEEP

C :AM 630 kHz

Flashes

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MUTE VOLUME

SLEEP

A :AM 630 kHz

PRESET/

TUNING

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

C3:AM 630 kHz

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

C3:AM 630 kHz

0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM43

TUNING

Exchanging Preset Stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on left.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING EDIT for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Tuning in to a Preset Station

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

*1 These buttons can be used to directly select the preset group

(A to E from left to right).

*2 These buttons can be used to directly select the preset station

number 1 to 8.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

Note

• Make sure that “TUNER” mode is selected if operating using

the remote control.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET –/+

on the remote control) to select a preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

PRESET

DISC

PRESET/

TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

MUTE VOLUME

SLEEP

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

VCR DVD TUNER CDCD RV AUX 1

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

MEMORY

EDIT E1-A5

Shows the exchange of stations has

been completed.

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

2,41,31,3

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

MEMORY

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD R1

CBL

SAT

TAPE

TUNED

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

TUNING

0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM44

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC RECORDING

REC OUT/ZONE 2 allows you to record one source

while watching and/or listening to another source.

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components.

1 Turn on the power to this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2.

• To record the current input source that you are

watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2

to SOURCE/REMOTE.

• To record a source other than the one that you are

watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2

to the source you want to record.

Note

• At this setting, you can change the source to listen to or watch

during recording by rotating INPUT (one of the input selector

buttons on the remote control).

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

• Setting REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE and using

the BGV function (see page 30) allows the recording of audio

and video from a different source.

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,

VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP

programs does not affect the recorded material.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal by your VCR.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material

may infringe copyright laws.

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your

player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its

operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog

signal will be output from the player.

■ Timer playback/recording

This unit can perform playback or recording with an

external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation

instruction for the component and the timer to be used.

Notes

• The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the

playback or recording with the timer.

• If you do not want any sound output during the recording with

a timer, turn the volume down.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so

on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if

the timer is turned off for more than one week, the

stored data will be lost.

BASS

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

SILENT

PROGRAM

STEREO

REC OUT

/ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MODE

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

EFFECT

SOURCE

/REMOTE

MD/TAPE

CD–R

TUNER

PHONO

DVD

D–TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

V–AUX

VCR2

/DVR

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300

TREBLE

–

6CH

INPUT

DIGITAL

1 2

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM45

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To

control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes.

This remote control also has two sophisticated features: Learn and Macro. The Learn feature allows it to acquire

functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with

an infrared remote control receiver. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence for

operation by a single button, or to use the factory-set macros to operate other YAMAHA components. These features

make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room.

Notes

• For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7.

• For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7.

Control Area

■ Control area of this unit

The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown

below. You can use the functions within this area no

matter which component control area is selected.

■ Control area for each component

The component control area is the shaded area shown

below. Each component has different functions for the

operation buttons in the component control area. The

component which has been chosen by pressing an input

selector button or SOURCE SELECT k/n can be

controlled and the display window shows the

corresponding name of the component to be operated.

Å/ı buttons and input

selector buttons switch the

control area for each

component.

* Å/ı buttons is to operate

the other components that are

not connected to this unit.

Factory setting:

Å ........... LD player

ı ..... Satellite tuner

Component control area

There are 13 component control areas. You can set up the

manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in

each area. See pages 55 to 59.

Input selector

buttons, and Å/ı

buttons

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

6.1/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

SPORTS

MONO

MOVIE

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

DISPLAY

PLAY

– +

ENTER

100

11 12

234

DSP is selected

10 key is selected

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM46

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Note

• You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even

if Yamaha manufacture code is initially set as listed above. In

this case, try to set other Yamaha manufacture code(s).

1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select the source component you want to set

up.

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“SETUP” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Notes

• Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning

process is started.

• Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise,

the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case,

press LEARN again.

3 Press k / n to select the name of your

component’s manufacturer.

You will find the names of most worldwide audio-

video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the

display window.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press l / h. You can set a

different component from the input selector

name.

Library choices: L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR,

L:MD, L:TAP, L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB,

L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR

■ Amplifier Library (L:AMP)

The code to operate this unit has been preset in the

supplied remote control. However you can change the

code in Amplifier Library if necessary.

Amplifier Library has the following four codes:

YPC: Code to operate this unit.

Zone 2: Code to use the Zone 2 function.

DSP: Code to operate other Yamaha DSP amplifiers that

cannot be operated with the YPC code.

NO: Code to operate other manufacturers’ amplifiers

using this unit’s remote control.

4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

check if it works for the component being

set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting

has been correctly made.

Note

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

codes, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

Setting the Manufacturer Code

You can control other components by setting a

manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each input

area.

The following table shows factory-set component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each area. If you are to make a setting for different

component from the factory setting, change the library as

described in step 3 on right.

LEARN

Input area

PHONO

V-AUX

TUNER

Component category

(Library)

SAT

VCR

TUNER

Manufacturer

Yamaha

–

Yamaha-1

ENTER

6CH INPUT

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

Yamaha-1

Yamaha

–

Yamaha-1

MD/TAPE

CD-R

D-TV/LD

VCR 1

VCR 2/DVR

DVD

CD-R

VCR

DVD

CBL/SAT

CABLE

Yamaha-1

–

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM47

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

3 Place this remote control and the other

remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart on a

flat surface so that their infrared transmitters

are aimed at each other.

4 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three

seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer

code setting mode.

Notes

• Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise,

the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case,

press LEARN again.

• Do not press and hold LEARN longer than 3 seconds.

Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode.

5 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” is displayed.

LEARN

5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

• Supplied remote control does not store all the manufacturer

codes for commercially availabvle AV components (including

Yamaha AV components). Therefore it may not work to operate

your AV component. If operation is not possible with any of the

manfacturer codes, program the new remote control function

with the Learn feature or use the remote control for the

component.

• If you have already programmed a remote control function for a

button, the function by learning programming takes priority

over the setup manufacturer code’s function.

•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing

buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one

button at once.

Learn Feature

If you want to program functions not included in the basic

operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a

manufacturer code is not available, the following

procedure needs to be performed. The possible

programming area is the same as a component control

area, so the buttons are programmable independently for

each source component area.

Note

• This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn

most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you

may not be able to program some special signals or extremely

long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the

other remote control.)

■ Programming a new remote

control function

1 Set 10KEY/DSP to 10KEY.

Notes

• It is also possible to program in the control area of this unit

with 10KEY/DSP set to DSP. However, if you program

functions in this area, you cannot control this unit and select a

DSP program.

2 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select a source component.

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inch)

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

SOURCE

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

LEARN

DSP

10KEY

Flashes alternately

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

SOURCE

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM48

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

LEARN

Changing the Source Name in the

Display Window

You can change the name that appears in the display

window on the remote control if you want to use the

different name from the original input selector button

names. This is useful when different component is set in

the input selector button.

1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select the source component you want to

rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press RE-NAME by using

a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

3 Press k / n to select a character.

Choices are A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen),

and /(slash).

4 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next

position.

• If you continuously want to rename another source component,

press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the

renaming mode.

Note

•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing

buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one

button at once.

RE-NAME

ENTER

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

RE-NAME

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

SOURCE

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

6 Press and hold the button on the other

remote control that has the function you

want to program into this remote control

until “OK” appears in the display window.

Notes

•“NG” appears in the display window when programming has

not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 5.

• This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions.

However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In

this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make

further learning on the remote control.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program additional

functions.

• To learn functions in other source component control area,

press SOURCE SELECT k / n in step 4 to select other source

component.

8 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning

mode.

Notes

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak

– when the distance between the two remote controls is too

much or too little

– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing at

the appropriate angle

– when the remote control is exposed to the direct sunlight

– when the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon

•“ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing

buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one

button at once.

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM49

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Using the Macro Feature

The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when

you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to

start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The

macro buttons (the input selector buttons, Å and ı buttons, SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY) are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 51).

*1 In order to turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit, connect those

components to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit

depending on the component. For details, please refer to the operation instruction for the connected component.)

*2 If the macro you select includes power control functions, the component may be turned off if it is already on when

you press the macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the

TV is turned off.

*3 By factory setting, playback can be started with any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorders, CD

players, CD recorders, DVD players, and LD players. When using macros to operate other components, it is either

necessary to program the PLAY button on the control area of that component (see pages 48 and 49) or to set up a

manufacturer code (see page 47).

*4 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit receives the last station when this unit is set in the standby

mode.

(DVD area) (*3)

Press one of the macro buttons

Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially

SYSTEM

POWER

PLAY

(CD area)

Macro buttons

PHONO

V-AUX

TUNER

MD/TAPE

CD-R

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

DVD

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

First Second

–

Third

–

PHONO

V-AUX

TUNER

MD/TAPE

CD-R

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

DVD

SYSTEM

POWER

PLAY

(*1)

(D-TV/LD area) (*2)

PLAY

(MD/TAPE area) (*3)

(CD-R area) (*3)

(CD area) (*3)

(VCR 1 area) (*3)

(VCR 2/DVR area) (*3)

(*4)

STANDBY

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.8.21, 7:01 PM50

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

2 Press a macro button for which you want to

program the macro operation.

The button you chose for programming the macro

operation and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Note

•“AGAIN” appears in the display window when a button other

than the macro buttons is pressed.

3 Press the buttons of the functions that you

want to include in the macro operation

sequence in order.

• You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10

steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically

exits from the macro mode.

Notes

•“NG” appears in the display window when programming has

not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 2.

• If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE

SELECT k / n. When you use the input selector buttons,

selecting the input is programmed as a macro step, whereas

SOURCE SELECT k / n only changes the component.

■ Operating the macro

1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2 Press a macro button.

Notes

• When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO

ON/OFF to OFF.

• While this unit is carrying out a macro program, this unit does

not receive any other button’s function until the macro

operation has been completed (the TRANSMIT indicator stops

flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation has been completed.

■ Programming a macro

You can program your own macros and use the Macro

feature to transmit many remote control commands by

pressing a single button.

Notes

• The factory-set macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The factory-set macro can be used

again when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the

factory-set macro. Programming a macro changes all macro

contents.

• A macro programming is used to transmit learning or setup (or

YAMAHA preset) button signals of this remote control to a

macro button. If necessary, set up the manufacturer code or

program a function with the remote control for your

component.

• This remote control handles button signals that operate

continuously, such as volume control, as short time interval

codes. Macro programming that include these types of macro

steps are therefore not recommended.

1 Press MACRO by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

Note

• Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise,

the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case,

press MACRO again.

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

POWER

Macro buttons

MACRO

MACRO ON/OFF

MACRO

indicate the number

of macro steps you

entered

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

MCR 2 : DVD p

MCR 1 : DVD a

appear alternately so that you can

set up the next step

STANDBY

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM51

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

4 Press MACRO again when

the operation sequence

you want to program is

complete.

Note

•“ERROR” appears in the display when pressing butons other

than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once.

Memory back-up

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

MACRO

Clearing Learned Functions,

Macros, Renamed Source Names,

and Setup Manufacturer Codes

1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

Note

• Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise,

the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case,

press CLEAR again.

CLEAR

Clears all programmed functions

including setup manufacturer

codes. This returns to the

factory settings.

(L: name of a component) Clears

all learned functions for the

component area. Press the input

selector button, Å or ı to select

the component.

Clears all learned functions for

this unit control area.

Clears all learned functions.

Clears all programmed macros.

Clears all renamed source

names in the display window.

2 Press k / n to select the clear mode.

The mode is shown in the display window in the

following order:

3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

Note

•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.

4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.

Once you have cleared a learned function or macro

for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting.

Note

•“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following

circumstances:

– when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER;

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET

MENU is switched to another position.

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM52

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

MACRO

LEARN

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

LEARN

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-A UX

Clearing a Macro Function

1 Press MACRO to clear a programmed macro

by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

Note

• Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise

the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case,

press MACRO again.

2 Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint

pen or similar object, then press the button

for which you want to clear the macro for

about 3 seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

• You can clear other macros at this time by holding down

CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons for which those

macros have been programmed.

Note

•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. In this case, try step 2 again.

3 Press MACRO again to exit from the clearing

mode.

Once you have cleared macro for a button, the button

reverts to the factory setting.

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

Clearing a Learned Function

You can clear the function learned in a certain

programmable button in each area.

1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to

select the source component you want to

clear the function.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Note

• Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise

the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case,

press LEARN again.

3 Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint

pen or similar object, then press the button

for which you want to clear the function for

about 3 seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

• You can clear other learned functions at this time by holding

down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons for which

those learned functions have been programmed.

Note

•“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. In this case, try step 3 again.

4 Press LEARN again to

exit.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a

button, the button reverts to the factory setting.

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM53

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ SOURCE SELECT k / n

You can control another component independently from

the input you have selected by pressing an input selector

button.

Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to choose the

component and set the remote control to be

used for it.

The display window will show one of the following:

(when pressing n) OPTN (option), Å, ı, PHONO,

V-AUX, TUNER, MD, CD-R, CD, TV/LD (TV or

digital TV/LD), CBSAT (cable TV/satellite tuner),

VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD.

• Pressing k shows the same in the reverse order, but you cannot

select OPTN.

■ OPTN (option) area

OPTN is an extra component control area that can be

programmed with other remote control functions.

• For the signals that will be used only in macro, it is

recommended to learn signals in the OPTN area.

Note

• You cannot set up the manufacturer code in this area.

■ Zone 2

When you make up a second audio-video room with this

unit’s Zone 2 feature, you must set “Zone2” as the

amplifier library in the remote control first. Selecting

“Zone2” by pressing k sets the remote control to the

Zone 2 mode. See pages 75 and 76 for details.

Pressing n always selects OPTN first

SELECT

SOURCE

Pressing k selects “Zone2” first

6CH INPUT

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

6CH INPUT

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

■ Light up function

The buttons which are active and the display window

light up for 10 seconds after pressing LIGHT.

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

CLEAR LEARN MACRO

OFF ON

MACRO

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

1 234

Area that lights up (Only buttons

that send the signal light up in

orange.)

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM54

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Each Component Control Area

The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component

you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button, Å / ı, or SOURCE SELECT k / n to

select a component you want to control.

■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area)

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

–+

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR areas)

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

DISPLAY

DISC +/– (disc skip)

STOP

Title/Index

TITLE

(TOP MENU)

Return

POWER

Menu cursor/ENTER

Audio

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

Clear

CH +/– (channel)

POWER

Record

(Press twice to start recording)

TV/Video input

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 7/26/02, 5:53 PM55

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV (CBL/

SAT area)

Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 47 because TV is

factory-set for this input selector button.

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in PHONO.

* SEARCH, REC, STOP, PAUSE and PLAY function to operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the

manufacturer code is set in VCR 1.

■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD area)

CH +/– (channel)

DISPLAY

POWER

Enter

TV INPUT

TV VOL +/–

TV MUTE

Numeric buttons

Clear

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

Chapter/Time

SOUND

CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search)

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM56

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

■ Operating a CD player (CD area)

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area)

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

DISC +/– (disc skip)

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

INDEX

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

Clear

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

INDEX

(CD-R only)

Skip serch

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

Clear

(CD-R only)

Record

(MD only)

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM57

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area)

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

* TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the

manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-

TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area.

■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area)

SEARCH backward/forward

Record

STOP

INDEX

A/B

Direction A/B

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric button

PRESET +/–

POWER

Preset group A

Preset group B

Preset group C

Preset group A/B/C/D/E

Preset number 1 to 8

Preset group E

Preset group D

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM58

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

STANDBY

6CH INPUT

SOUND

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

100

11 12

234

■ Operating the component set in

Å or ı

These buttons are not input selector buttons but simply provide the space for an extra component to control with this

unit’s remote control without making connection to this unit. The white area shown below can be used for the

component set in Å and ı, and the function for each button differs depending on the component.

YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in Å and satellite tuner in ı. However if you want to set other component, set the

manufacturer code for the component you want to set in the Å / ı button following the manufacturer code setting

procedure described on page 47.

The functions of these buttons in the

component control area differ for the

component you set in Å or ı.

0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:06 PM59

Adjusting the Items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Adjustment procedures are explained using SET MENU 2

LOW FRQ TEST as an example.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to SET MENU.

2 Press k / n repeatedly to select the item (1 to

16) you want to adjust.

Note

• If k is pressed when SET MENU 1 is selected, and if n is

pressed when SET MENU 16 is selected, SET MENU will be

closed. Press k / n to open SET MENU again.

PARAMETER

SET MENU

ADVANCED OPERATION

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

2, 3, 5

3, 4

The SET MENU consists of 16 items including the

speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and

parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate

item and adjust or select the values as necessary.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

• We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU

while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video

monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit

while adjusting the items.

Note

• The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of

the OSD.

1 SPEAKER SET

1A CENTER SP

1B MAIN SP

1C REAR L/R SP

1D REAR CT SP

1E LFE/BASS OUT

1F FRONT EFCT SP

1G MAIN LEVEL

1H SP B SET

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

5 CENTER GEQ

6 INPUT RENAME

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

7A CMPNT-V INPUT

7B OPTICAL OUT

7C OPTICAL IN

7D COAXIAL IN

SET MENU 1/4

≥2LOWFRQTEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Enter

1 SPEAKER SET

8 INPUT MODE

9 PARAM. INI

10 LFE LEVEL

11 D. RANGE

12 SP DELAY

13 DISPLAY SET

14 MEMORY GUARD

15 6CH INPUT SET

16 ZONE 2 SET

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM60

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

• Select SML/SMALL if the woofer diameter of you speaker is

smaller than 16 cm. If it is larger than 16 cm, select LRG/

LARGE.

Note

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.

■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker

mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

this unit can provide good dialog localization for many

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center

speaker depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signal are directed to the left and right

main speakers.

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

3 Press –/+ once to enter the setup mode of

the selected item.

The last setting you adjusted appears on the video

monitor or on the front panel display.

Depending on the item, press n to select a sub item.

4 Press –/+ repeatedly to change the setting of

the item.

5 Press k / n repeatedly until the current DSP

program appears or simply press one of the

DSP program group buttons to exit from the

SET MENU.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from

the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than

one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE…………ON

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

LRG SML NONE

1A CENTER SP

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

100

11 12

234

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

/DTS

SUR.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE………OFF

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 7/26/02, 6:01 PM61

SET MENU

■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker

mode)

The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers

depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

left and right rear speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

Note

• If “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE, “1D REAR CT SP”

will be skipped.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting

NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP” (see page 34).

LARGE SMALL

1B MAIN SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG SML NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LARGE SMALL

1B MAIN SP

■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)

The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending

on how you set this item.

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Initial setting: LARGE

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire

range of the left and right main channel signal is directed

to the left and right main speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS

OUT”.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are

directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the

main speaker mode.

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM62

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out

mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-

frequency signals are directed to both main right and left

speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for

both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

Initial setting: BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals

are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix

the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE

signals. LFE signals for the main L/R speakers are output

from both L/R speakers and subwoofer.

Note

• The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main,

center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE

channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A,

1B, 1C and 1D.

■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center

speaker mode)

By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker

configuration, this unit can provide more realistic front-

to-back and transitions. The initial setting is “LRG”.

Note

• If “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE, “1D REAR CT SP”

will be skipped.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The

entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to

the rear center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

center channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“1E LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of

the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and

right rear speakers.

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

LRG SML NONE

1D REAR CT SP

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM63

SET MENU

■ 1F FRONT EFCT SP (front effect

speaker mode)

This unit uses front effect speakers to localize the virtual

sound sources of the sound field programs. If you do not

use front effect speakers, you can direct the front effect

signals to the main speakers.

The OSD shows small or no front effect speakers

depending on how you set this item.

Choices: YES, NONE

Initial setting: YES

YES

Select this setting if you use front effect speakers.

NONE

Select this setting if you do not use front effect speakers.

The front effect signals are mixed with the main channels.

1F FRONT EFCT SP

YES NONE

1F FRONT EFCT SP

YES NONE

■ 1H SP B SET (speaker B set)

Use this feature to select the location of the main speakers

to be connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: MAIN, ZONE B

Initial setting: MAIN

MAIN

Select this to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the

speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set

in the main room.

ZONE B

Select this if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the second room. If SPEAKERS A is

turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the

effect speakers in the main room are muted and the sound

is output only from SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, this unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. If the headphones are

connected to PHONES jack on this unit in the Virtual

CINEMA DSP mode, this unit enters the SILENT CINEMA

DSP mode and the sound is output from both headphones and

SPEAKERS B.

1H SP B SET

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

MAIN “ZONE B

■ 1G MAIN LEVEL (main level

mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level

of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the

main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency

performance of the main speakers.

Choices: Normal, –10 dB

Initial setting: Normal

Normal

Select this if you can match the output level of your effect

speakers with that of your main speakers when using the

test tone.

Normal -10dB

1G MAIN LEVEL

Normal -10dB

1G MAIN LEVEL

1H SP B SET

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

“MAIN ZONE B

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when

using the test tone.

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM64

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

2 LOW FRQ TEST

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the

subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your

configuration. Change the setting with the remote control

while sitting in the listening position.

1 Press –/+ to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and

adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you

can hear the tone.

Notes

• Do not turn up the volume too high.

• If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in

the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections

are correct.

2 Press n to go to “OUTPUT” and press –/+ to

select the speaker you want to compare with

the subwoofer.

If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will

not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will

not necessarily be output from the selected speakers.

The output mode of the test tone depends on the

settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU.

3 Press n to go to “FRQ” and press –/+ to

select the frequency you want to use.

3 L/R BALANCE

-/+ : Adjust

/ : Exit

…………………… ……………………

4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the

controls on the subwoofer so it matches that

of the speaker you are comparing it to.

■ About the test tone

The test tone is produced by the tone generator.

The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise

centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter

beside a wide-band noise.

You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through

250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps.

You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the

subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency

characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency

sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position,

speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other

conditions.

Digital generator

(wide band noise produced)

Band pass filter

35 Hz – 250 HzCenter freq.

Freq.

Noise

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the

left and right main speakers)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level

from the left and right main speakers.

Control range: 10 steps for L/R

Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R

Press + to decrease the output level for the

left main speaker. Press – for the right main

speaker.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

≥ FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

2 LOW FRQ TEST

OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

≥ TEST TONE…………ON

2 LOW FRQ TEST

≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R

FRQ……………………88Hz

TEST TONE………OFF

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM65

SET MENU

6 INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input which

appears on the OSD or the front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button to select the

input you want to change the name of.

2 Press –/+ to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

3 Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and –/+ to move to the next one.

• Press n to change the character in the following

order, or press k to go in the reverse order.

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #,

*, +, and so on.

• Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other

inputs.

Note

• You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs.

4 Press + repeatedly to exit from INPUT

RENAME.

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD1

6 INPUT RENAME

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

DVD ≥ DVD

5 CENTER GEQ

≥ 300Hz

1kHz

3kHz

10kHz

+3dB

100Hz

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone

control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL

(treble)

Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic

equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches

that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.

Control range (dB): –6 to +6

Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band

1 Press n to select a higher frequency and k

to select a lower frequency.

2 Press –/+ to adjust the level of that

frequency.

• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this

item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the

foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” or “TEST DSP”

appears on the video monitor, and the test tone starts

alternating among the speakers. Once you begin this procedure,

the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear

how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency

levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST (see pages 26 to 28).

4 HP TONE CTRL

TRBL

0dB

≥ BASS

5 CENTER GEQ

300Hz

1kHz

3kHz

10kHz

0dB

≥ 100Hz

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM66

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL

INPUT jacks (3) to (6)

Choices: (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/

TAPE, CD-R

(4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR,

VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,

MD/TAPE

(5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD,

PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/

SAT, D-TV/LD

(6) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/

TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1

Initial settings: (3) CD

(4) CD-R

(5) DVD

(6) CBL/SAT

■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL

INPUT jacks (7) and (8)

Choices: (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR,

VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD,

MD/TAPE, CD-R

(8) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R,

CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR,

VCR 1, CBL/SAT

Initial settings: (7) CD

(8) D-TV/LD

Note

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

7D COAXIAL IN

≥ (8)……………D-TV/LD

(7)…………… CD

7C OPTICAL IN

(4)…………… CD-R

≥ (5)…………… DVD

(6)……………CBL/SAT

(3)…………… CD

7A CMPNT-V INPUT

[B]……………CBL/SAT

≥ [A]…………… DVD

7B OPTICAL OUT

(2)…………… CD-R

≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

It is possible to assign jacks according to the component

to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack

or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component

names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes

it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively

connect more component.

Once you assign, you can select that component with

INPUT (the input selector buttons on the remote control).

■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for

COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks

[A] and [B]

Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD

[B] CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX,

VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1

Initial settings: [A] DVD

[B] CBL/SAT

■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL

OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2)

Choices: (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO,

V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/

SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD

(2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/

DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD,

DVD, MD/TAPE

Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE

(2) CD-R

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM67

SET MENU

9 PARAM. INI (parameter

initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP

program within a DSP program group. When you

initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter

values within that group revert to their initial settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for

the DSP program that you want to initialize.

The asterisk (*) next to the program number means

that the parameter values have been changed.

Notes

• You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a

group separately.

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 71),

you cannot initialize any program groups.

• Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot

automatically revert to the previous parameter settings.

9 PARAM. INI

* 5 678

9 *10 11

Press No. Key

1 23*4

10 LFE LEVEL

HEADPHONE…………0dB

≥ SPEAKER………………0dB

10 LFE LEVEL

HEADPHONE…………0dB

≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB

10 LFE LEVEL

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes

Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the

low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

1 Press k / n to select the item to be adjusted.

2 Press –/+ to adjust the LFE level.

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

8 INPUT MODE (initial input

mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

on this unit (see page 31 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Initial setting: AUTO

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for that source.

Note

• Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button

will not be recalled.

8 INPUT MODE

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

AUTO LAST

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM68

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

11 D-RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting

is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital

signals.

Choices: MAX, STD, MIN

Initial setting: MAX (for both speakers and headphones)

MAX

Select the “MAX” setting for feature films.

STD

Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use.

MIN

Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at

extremely low volume levels.

11 D-RANGE

HP: MAX STD MIN

≥ SP: MAX STD MIN

12 SP DELAY

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the

Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when

there is sound output from the center speakers with a

source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the Center

speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same

distance from the main listening position as the left and

right Main speakers. However, in most home situations,

the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in

line with the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By

delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear

Center speaker, the apparent distance from the Center

speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening

position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the

distance between the left and right Main speaker, and the

left and right Rear speakers to the listening position.

Adjusting the delay time for the Center speaker is

especially important for giving depth to the dialogue.

1 Press k / n to select “UNIT”.

2 Press –/+ to select the unit to be used for

setting.

Select one from “msec”, “meters”, and “feet”.

Notes

• Setting items change depending on the unit chosen.

• When “meters” or “feet” is selected, enter the distance from

your listening position to each speaker.

3 Press k / n to select the speaker for which

the delay is adjusted.

4 Press –/+ to set the delay.

Press + for higher value and – for lower value.

Center speaker image

12 SP DELAY

CENTER……………0.0ms

REAR CT…………3.0ms

≥ UNIT……………………msec

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM69

SET MENU

13 DISPLAY SET

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Control range: –4 to 0

Initial setting: 0

■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)

This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the

OSD.

Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

Initial setting: 0

Press + to lower the position of the OSD.

Press – to raise the position of the OSD.

■ GRAY BACK

Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays

a gray background when there’s no video signal input.

Nothing is displayed on the screen including the on-

screen display if OFF is selected.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

Initial setting: AUTO

Note

• If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be

displayed on the screen when video signals are not being input.

■ V CONV. (Video conversion)

Use this feature to turn on/off the function to convert

composite signals to S-video signals to output through the

S-video jack when no S-video signals are input.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: OFF

OFF

Select this not to convert composite signals to S-video

signals.

Select this to convert composite signals to S-video

signals.

13 DISPLAY SET

OSD SHIFT………………0

≥ DIMMER………………………0

GRAY BACK………AUTO

V CONV.………………OFF

12 SP DELAY

MAIN L/R……10.0ft

CENTER…………10.0ft

REAR L/R……10.0ft

≥ UNIT……………………feet

REAR CT…………7.0ft

■ Setting by “msec”

Control range: 0 to 5.0 ms (for center), 0 to 30.0 ms

(for rear center)

Initial settings: 0 ms (for center), 3.0 ms (for rear

center)

■ Setting by “meters”

Control range: 0.15 to 30.00 m (for main L/R,

center, rear L/R, rear center)

Initial settings: 3.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/

R), 2.10 m (for rear center)

■ Setting by “feet”

Control range: 0.5 to 100 ft (for main L/R, center,

rear L/R, rear center)

Initial settings: 10.0 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/

R), 7.0 ft (for rear center)

Note

• No delay will be set if the same distance is set for the main L/R

and center, or the rear L/R and rear center with “meters” or

“feet” selected.

12 SP DELAY

CENTER……………0.0ms

REAR CT…………3.0ms

≥ UNIT……………………msec

12 SP DELAY

MAIN L/R………3.00m

CENTER……………3.00m

REAR L/R………3.00m

≥ UNIT………………meters

REAR CT…………2.10m

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM70

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

14 MEMORY GUARD

-/+ : Select

/ : Exit

OFF ON

14 MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other settings on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear speakers, rear center, front effect, and

subwoofer levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

Notes

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use

the test tone.

• When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select

any other SET MENU items.

15 6CH INPUT SET

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input

into the center and subwoofer channels when the source

component is connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

■ 15A CENTER to (direction of the

center channel signals)

This item sets the direction of the signals input into the

CENTER jack.

Choices: CENTER, MAIN

Initial setting: CENTER

CENTER

The input signals are output from the center speaker.

MAIN

The input signals are directed to the main L/R speakers

with same level.

■ 15B SWFR to (direction of the

signals input into the subwoofer)

This item sets the direction of the signals input into the

SUBWOOFER jack.

Choices: SWFR, MAIN

Initial setting: SWFR

SWFR

The input signals are output from the subwoofer.

MAIN

The input signals are directed to the main L/R speakers

with same level.

CENTER MAIN

15A CENTER to

SWFR MAIN

15B SWFR to

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM71

SET MENU

16 ZONE2 SET

Use this feature to make a setting for audio output to

ZONE 2 OUT.

■ OUTPUT VOL (output volume)

This item changes the volume control setting for audio

output to ZONE 2 OUT.

Choices: VAR., FIX

Initial setting: VAR.

VAR.

To adjust the ZONE 2 OUT volume with VOLUME +/–

on the remote control.

FIX

To fix the ZONE 2 OUT volume to the volume level of

this unit.

■ SP OUT

Use this feature to switch assignment of the front effect

speakers’ output destination.

Choices: OFF, ON

Initial setting: OFF

To assign the amplifier outputs for the front effect channel

to the ZONE 2 OUT SPEAKERS terminals.

OFF

To assign the amplifier outputs for the front effect channel

to FRONT EFFECT speaker terminals as normal

operation.

• When SP OUT is set to ON, 1F FRONT EFCT SP will be

automatically set to NONE. When it is switched to OFF, 1F

FRONT EFCT SP will be set to the previous setting.

Note

• When SP OUT is set to ON, it is not necessary to connect

ZONE 2 OUT jacks.

16 ZONE2 SET

SP OUT…………………OFF

≥ OUTPUT VOL……VAR.

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM72

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

3 Press –/+ to adjust the speaker output level.

• The control range for the center, left and right rear,

front effect or rear center speakers is from +10 dB

to –10 dB.

• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB

to –20 dB.

Notes

• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you

made with the test tone (“TEST DOLBY SUR.” or “TEST

DSP”) will be changed.

• When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you

cannot adjust the output level by using LEVEL. However, each

time you press LEVEL, the current level of each speaker

appears on the front panel display and you can check the

speaker level.

• When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP”, “1C

REAR L/R SP”, “1D REAR CT SP” and “1F FRONT EFCT

SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” to MAIN, the

output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there

is no sound coming from these speakers.

• During playback of the source input through the 6CH INPUT

jacks, the level can be adjusted independently for the center,

right and left rear, and subwoofer.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby

mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from

the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than

one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the

output level again.

You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker

(center, left and right rear, rear center, front effect and

subwoofer) while listening to a music source.

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to PARAMETER.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker

changes and appears on the front panel display and

on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear,

rear center, left rear, front effect and subwoofer.

LEVEL

PARAMETER

SET MENU

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS

• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to

be adjusted by pressing n/k.

Center speaker output level

Front effect speaker output

level

Left rear speaker output

level

Rear center speaker output

level

Right rear speaker output

level

Subwoofer output level

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM73

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The

sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer

also automatically turns off the external components

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions

of the timer.

Setting the Sleep Timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly

to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP,

the front panel display changes

as shown below. The SLEEP

indicator flashes while

switching the amount of time

for sleep timer.

The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front

panel display after the sleep timer has been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

SLEEP TIMER

Canceling the Sleep Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit

in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control

(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the

AC power cord from the AC outlet.

SLEEP

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP 90 min.

SLEEP 60 min.SLEEP 30 min.SLEEP OFF

VCR DVD TUNER CD

PHONO

CD RV AUX

DSP

DIGITAL

VCR2/DVR

CBL

SAT

TAPE

VOLUME

SLEEP

CONCERT HALL1

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM74

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

■ Example of a system configuration and connections

Notes

• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2 volume with the control on

the amplifier in the second room.

• DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS to avoid unexpected noise.

ZONE 2

You can make up a multi-room audio-video system with this unit. This feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce

separate input sources in the main room and second room (Zone 2) with the supplied remote control in the second room.

Only analog signals are sent to the second room. For any source you want to listen to in the second room, you must

connect the analog output jack from the source to the corresponding analog input jack on this unit.

Zone 2 Connections

To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second room

• An infrared emitter in the main room

This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room

(for example, to a CD player or LD player).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second room

• A video monitor for the second room

REMOTE CONTROL OUT

DVD INPUT

REMOTE CONTROL IN

ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

OUT

REMOTE

CONTROL OUT

Main room

Infrared signal

receiver

Remote control

Second room

Amplifier

Infrared emitter

This unit

DVD player

(or other component)

This unit

• Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a

multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with

the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for

the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your

requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the

REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these

products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6

YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.

Video

monitor

0110V3300_75-76_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM75

ZONE 2

■ Special considerations when

using DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Therefore, if you

attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room, you

will only be able to hear the digital noise sound that could

damage your speakers.

Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the

following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS

Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be sent to the

second room, as follows:

• LDs

Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the

analog soundtrack.

• DVDs

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-

channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or

Dolby Digital soundtrack.

For CDs encoded with DTS

DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with

DTS to avoid unexpected noise.

Remote Control in Zone 2

In the second room (Zone 2), the supplied remote control

can be used for the Zone 2 remote control. You can select

the input source and control the component which is

located in the main room directly from the second room

regardless of the listening condition in the main room.

Before starting the following procedure, set REC OUT/

ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in

“Setting the Manufacturer Code” on page 47.

2 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”.

3 Press k / n to select “Zone2”.

4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone 2 setup.

5 Press SOURCE SELECT k to display

“Zone2” in the display window.

6 Press an input selector button to select the

input source you want to listen to in the

second room.

The display window shows “2: name of selected

input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode.

* The SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY button on the remote

control works for the second room.

7 You can control the component by using the

component control area buttons.

8 Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to exit from

the Zone 2 mode.

ENTER

LEARN

SELECT

SOURCE

SELECT

SOURCE

6CH INPUT

SOUND

TITLE

CHAPTER

PAUSESTOPPOWER

REC

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

EFFECT

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DISPLAY

SOURCE

PLAY

– +

ENTER

100

11 12

234

STANDBY

SYSTEM

PHONO

DVD

VCR2/DVR

VCR 1

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

CD-R

MD/TAPE

TUNER

V-AUX

POWER

0110V3300_75-76_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM76

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

What Is a Sound Field?

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections

enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,

there are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or

a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct

sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of

a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

Sound Field Program Parameters

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from

you to the performer, etc. In each program, these

parameters are set with values precisely calculated by

YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.

It is recommended to use DSP programs without

changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also

allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with

one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those

parameters.

Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you

to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment

to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters

correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create

the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or

other listening environment. The size of the room, for

example, affects the length of time between the early

reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in

many of the DSP programs alters the timing between

these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”

you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of

the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a

significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb

sound, for example, cause the reflections and

reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly

reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a

longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters

allow you to control these and many other factors that

contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to

essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.

provided to create custom-tailored listening environments

that ideally match your mood and music.

See “DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS” on pages 79 to 82.

0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM77

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

4 Press k / n to select the

parameter.

5 Press –/+ to change the

parameter value.

When you set the parameter to

a value other than the factory-

set value, an asterisk mark (*)

appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to

change other program parameters.

Notes

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,

press k / n.

• You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY

GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to

change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to

OFF (see page 71).

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter value you edited will

return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter

value again.

Resetting a Parameter to the

Factory-set Value

■ To reset some of the parameters

to the factory-set values

Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and

hold –/+ until the value temporarily stops at the factory-

set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name

disappears on the video monitor.

■ To reset all of the parameters to

the factory-set values

Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of

the parameter values of all DSP programs within the

selected group to the factory-set values (see page 68).

This operation resets all of the parameter values of all

DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values.

Changing Parameter Settings

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set

parameters. Although you do not have to change the

initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to PARAMETER.

2 Turn on the video monitor

and press ON SCREEN

repeatedly to select the

full display mode.

3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.

PARAMETER

SET MENU

P05 ROCK CONCERT

≥ INIT.DLY…………15ms

ROOM SIZE…………1.0

LIVENESS…………………5

REV.TIME…………1.6s

The Roxy Theatre

DSP LEVEL…………0dB

HALL 1

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

100

11 12

234

ON SCREEN

Program No.

Example of the parameter setting display

Parameters

Cursor

Program name

HALL 1

EX/ES

DSP

10KEY

ROCK

CONCERT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

TV INPUT

TV VOL

PRESET

DISC

PARAMETER

SET MENU

EFFECT

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

TESTSLEEP

TV MUTE

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

ENTER-

TAINMENT

HALL 2

CHURCH

JAZZ CLUB

SELECT

/DTS

SUR.

CHP/INDEX

A/B/C/D/E

100

11 12

234

Parameter valves

0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM78

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

Large value = 2.0Small value = 0.1

Sound Source

TimeTimeTime

Early

Reflections

Source Sound

Level

■ ROOM SIZE

[P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the

surround sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Large value = 99 msSmall value = 1 ms

Reflection Face

Sound Source

TimeTime Time

INIT.DLYINIT.DLYINIT.DLY

Early

Reflections

Source Sound

Level

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP LEVEL Control Range –6 dB – +3 dB

Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect

level relative to the direct sound.

■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay)

[P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] Control Range 1 – 99 msec

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the

direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther

the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a

large room, it would be set to a large value.

0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM79

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range

depends on the signal format.)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay for surround signals and surround sound field.

■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side

of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear

channels are used.

■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Control Range 0 –10

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

■ RC INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Control Range 1 – 49 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center

sound field.

■ RC ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Control Range 0.1 – 2.0

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.

■ RC LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Control Range 0 – 10

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.

Large value = 10Small value = 0

Large

Reflected Sound

Small Reflected

Sound

Sound Source

Live

TimeTimeTime

Dead

Source Sound

Level

■ LIVENESS Control Range 0 – 10

Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the

early reflections decay.

Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The

LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM80

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGDIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Time

REV. LEVEL

Source Sound

■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Time

REV. TIMEREV.

DELAY

Reverberation

Source Sound

Level

■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) Control Range 0 – 250 msec

Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Large value = 5.0 sSmall value = 1.0 s

Long

Reverberation

Short

Reverberation

Sound Source

REV. TIMEREV. TIMEREV. TIME

Early Reflections

ReverberationSource SoundReverberation

■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec

Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to

decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an

extremely wide range.

Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time

for “live” sources and listening room environments.

0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM81

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

For 8ch Stereo

■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume level for the center channel in 8-channel stereo mode.

■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume level for the rear left channel in 8-channel stereo mode.

■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume level for the rear right channel in 8-channel stereo mode.

■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume level for the rear center channel in 8-channel stereo mode.

■ FL LEVEL (Front Left Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume level for the front effect left channel in 8-channel stereo mode.

■ FR LEVEL (Front Right Level) Control Range 0 – 100 %

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume level for the front effect right channel in 8-channel stereo mode.

For PRO LOGIC Music

■ PANORAMA Control Range OFF/ON

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.

■ DIMENSION Control Range –3 – STD – +3

Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.

■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Control Range 0 – 7

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

For DTS Neo: 6 Music

■ C. IMAGE (Center Image) Control Range 0 – 0.5

Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers.

0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 7/26/02, 6:04 PM82

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact

the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

On-screen display

does not appear.

No sound and/or no

picture.

Cause

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

on the rear panel is not fully set to the

left or right position.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

The setting for the on-screen display is

set to “DISPLAY OFF”.

The GRAY BACK setting under “13

DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is

set to OFF, and no video signal is input

to this unit.

Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

An appropriate input source has not been

selected.

The speaker connections are not secure.

The main speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

The volume is turned down.

The sound is muted.

The signals that this unit cannot

reproduce such as a CD-ROM are being

input.

The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Remedy

Firmly connect the power cord.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in

the standby mode.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all

speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not

touch anything other than its respective connection.

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug

it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.

Select the full display or short display mode (see page 24).

Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD (see page

70).

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables

may be defective.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or 6CH INPUT

(or the input selector buttons) (see page 29).

Secure the connections (see page 12).

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B (see page

29).

Turn up the volume.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a

mute and adjust the volume (see page 30).

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

Make connections using the same type of jack (between

S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks)

for both the input and output.

0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 02.7.25, 7:11 PM83

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

No sound from the

center speaker.

No sound from the

rear speakers.

No sound from the

rear center speaker.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

Cause

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

The sleep timer has functioned.

The sound is muted.

Incorrect cable connections.

Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE”

on the SET MENU.

The sound effect is off.

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal does not have a center,

rear L/R or rear center channel signals.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 6

except for Game and 8ch Stereo) has

been selected.

The output level of the rear speakers is

set to minimum.

“1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU

is set to NONE.

A monaural source is being played with

the program 11.

“1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU

is set to NONE.

“1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU

is set to NONE.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal is being played.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a

2-channel source is being played.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

Remedy

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the

appropriate position and then turn this unit back on.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn

this unit back on.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a

mute and adjust the volume (see page 30).

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables

may be defective.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on (see page 34).

Raise the level of the center speaker (see pages 26 and 27).

Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker (see page

61).

Select another DSP program.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers (see pages 26 and 27).

Select the appropriate speaker mode for the rear L/R speakers

(see page 62).

Select another DSP program.

If the speaker mode for the rear L/R speakers is set to NONE, the

speaker mode for the rear center speaker is automatically set to

NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the rear L/R

speaker mode (see page 62).

Select LRG or SML (see page 63).

Select SWFR or BOTH (see page 63).

Select BOTH (see page 63).

0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 02.7.25, 7:11 PM84

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital or

DTS indicator on the

front panel display

does not light up.)

Poor bass

reproduction.

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

The volume level is low

while playing a record.

The volume level

cannot be increased, or

the sound is distorted.

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

A source cannot be

recorded.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

This unit does not

operate properly.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

Cause

“Digital output” and “Dolby Digital” or

“DTS” are not selected on the connected

components.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and

your system does not include a

subwoofer.

The output mode for each speaker (main,

center, rear, or rear center) on the SET

MENU does not match your speaker

configuration.

Incorrect cable connections.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The component connected to the

OUT(REC) jacks of this unit is turned

off.

It is not possible to record the sound

effect by a recording component.

A source component is connected to the

analog input jacks of this unit for digital

recording.

Digital connections are not made between

this unit and other components for

playback or recording.

A source component is connected to the

digital input jacks of this unit for analog

recording.

Analog connections are not made

between this unit and other components

for playback or recording.

Some recording components cannot

record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

“14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET

MENU is set to ON.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Speaker cables are short circuited.

Remedy

Make an appropriate setting following the operation

instructions for your component.

Select MAIN (see page 63).

Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on

the size of the speakers in your configuration (see pages 61–

64).

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the

cables may be defective.

Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND

terminal of this unit (see page 19).

The turntable should be connected to this unit through an

MC-head amplifier (see page 18).

Turn on the power to the component.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Make digital connections.

Connect a source component to the analog input jacks.

Make analog connections.

Select OFF (see page 71).

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug

it in again after about 30 seconds.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 02.7.25, 7:11 PM85

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

Problem

FM/

Cause

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Remedy

Re-store the stations.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath

interference.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for

best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help

somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Problem

The sound is degraded

when listening with

headphones connected

to a tape deck or CD

player that is connected

to this unit.

There is noise

interference from digital

or high-frequency

equipment, or this unit.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

Cause

This unit is in the standby mode.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

The internal temperature becomes too high

and the overheat protection circuitry has

been activated.

Remedy

Turn on the power of this unit.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on.

0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 02.7.25, 7:11 PM86

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Remote control

Problem

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

The remote control

does not “learn” new

functions.

Cause

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The batteries are weak.

The manufacturer code has not been

correctly set.

Even if the maufacturer code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

The batteries of this remote control and/

or the other remote control are too weak.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Memory capacity is full.

Remedy

The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6

m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the

front panel (see page 7).

Reposition this unit.

Replace the batteries.

Set the manufacturer code correctly (see page 47).

Try to set the other codes of the same maufacturer (see page

47).

Program the necessary functions independently into the

programmable buttons on this unit’s remote control using the

Learn feature.

Replace the batteries (see page 3).

Place the remote controls at the proper distance (see page 48).

Learning is not possible.

Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary

functions (see page 53).

0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 02.7.25, 7:11 PM87

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording

system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:

two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel

for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special

sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that

gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.

With three front channels (left, center and right), and two

rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-

range audio channels. With an additional channel

especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency

effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is

counted as 0.1 channel).

Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and

the precise sound orientation generated using digital

sound processing provide listeners with previously

unheard of excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital Surround EX

This unit is equipped with the Dolby Digital decoder that

can reproduce 5.1-channel sources adding a rear center

channel. (The sound to be output from a rear center

speaker is created by mixing the content of rear L/R

channels.) This decoder is the most suitable to reproduce

the soundtrack for the movies recorded by Dolby Digital

Surround EX. You can enjoy dynamic and realistic sounds

by adding another channel.

■ Dolby Pro Logic

Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode

vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This

new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback

with two left and right main channels, a center channel,

and two left and right rear channels compared with one

limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic

technology. Also the music mode is available for 2-

channel sources in addition to the movie mode.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial

representation of DTS digital surround in your home.

This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel

sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two

rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer,

for a total of 5.1 channels).

■ DTS ES (Extended Surround)

This unit is equipped with the DTS ES decoder that can

reproduce 5.1-channel sources adding a rear center

channel. The DTS ES decoder on this unit is compatible

with the two types of format: Discrete 6.1 and Matrix 6.1.

The DTS ES Discrete decoder enables the 6.1-channel

playback by adding a rear center channel recorded

independently from the 5.1 channels. The DTS ES Matrix

decoder enables the 6.1-channel playback by adding a

rear center created from the rear L/R channels. This

decoder is the most suitable to reproduce the music or the

soundtrack of the movies recorded by DTS ES.

■ Neo: 6

Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 achieves the high quality playback with all 5.1

channels at the sampling frequency 96 kHz / 24 bit.

0113V3300_88-91_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM88

English

INTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

GLOSSARY

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1 channel systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

DIGITAL

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and

designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and

so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are

differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth

of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any rear speakers by using

virtual rear speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a

minimum two-speaker system that does not include a

center speaker.

■ S VIDEO signal

With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the

and P

signals for the chrominance. Color can

be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent. The component

signal is also called the “color difference signal” because

the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in

order to use the component signal for output.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number

of quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ I/O assignment (SET MENU)

Although component is normally connected according to

jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a

function that assigns jacks according to the component

being connected. If the component being used differs

from the component name shown for this unit’s

component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks,

it is possible to assign jacks according to the component

being connected. This makes it possible to change the

jack assignment and effectively connect more component.

0113V3300_88-91_EN(UA) 02.7.24, 6:07 PM89

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power

Main, Center, Rear, R. Center

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.02% THD, 8 Ω) ............................... 130 W

Front effect

(1 kHz, 0.05% THD, 8 Ω) .................................................. 25 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 155/195/250/340 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 200 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω, MAIN IN to Main L/R .........0.008%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

Phono MM (5 mV) to Main L/R .......................................... 86 dB

CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz

• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity

PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ

6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level

REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ΖΟΝΕ 2 ................................................................. 150 mV/1.5 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type .......................................................... NTSC/PAL

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. model] ................................................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Australia model] .......................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. model] .................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz

[Australia model] ................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. model] .................................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] ....................................................... 500 W/640 VA

[Australia model] ................................................................. 500 W

Standby mode ............................................................ 0.7 W or less

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A. model] .......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[Australia model] ................................. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)

• Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 191 x 453 mm

(17-1/8" x 7-1/2" x 17-13/16")

• Weight ................................................................. 22 kg (48 lbs 8 oz)

0113V3300_88-91_EN(UA) 02.7.25, 7:13 PM90

OWNER’S MANUAL

RX-V3300

AV Receiver

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

V977800-1

0100V3300(UA)-cv1/4 02.8.21, 7:06 PM1

Documenttranscriptie

UA RX-V3300 AV Receiver YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN Printed MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V3300(UA)-cv1/4 1 OWNER’S MANUAL in Malaysia V977800-1 02.8.21, 7:06 PM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, I CAUTION 0101V3300_Cau_EN(UA) 2 02.7.24, 6:04 PM IMPORTANT SAFETY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1. 2. 3. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. CAUTION II 0101V3300_Cau_EN(UA) 3 02.7.24, 6:04 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. Model: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. III CAUTION 0101V3300_Cau_EN(UA) 4 02.7.24, 6:04 PM CONTENTS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES ............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3 Checking the Package Contents ................................ 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ................ 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 46 Control Area ............................................................ 46 Setting the Manufacturer Code ............................... 47 Learn Feature .......................................................... 48 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window ............................................................... 49 Using the Macro Feature ......................................... 50 Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes .. 52 Clearing a Learned Function ................................... 53 Clearing a Macro Function ...................................... 53 Each Component Control Area ............................... 55 PREPARATION Front Panel ................................................................ 4 Remote Control ......................................................... 6 Using the Remote Control ......................................... 7 Front Panel Display ................................................... 8 Rear Panel ................................................................. 9 INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU ........................................................... 60 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 10 CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15 Before Connecting Components ............................. 15 Connecting Video Components ............................... 15 Connecting Audio Components .............................. 18 Connecting the Antennas ......................................... 20 Connecting to an External Amplifier ...................... 21 Connecting to the 6CH INPUT Jacks ..................... 21 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ...................... 22 Turning on the Power .............................................. 23 OSD Modes ............................................................. 24 Selecting the OSD Mode ......................................... 24 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 25 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ....................................................... 73 SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 74 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ............................................................ 26 Setting the Sleep Timer ........................................... 74 Canceling the Sleep Timer ...................................... 74 Before You Begin .................................................... 26 TEST DOLBY SUR. ............................................... 26 TEST DSP ............................................................... 28 ZONE 2 ................................................................. 75 BASIC OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1H .......................................................... 25 ADVANCED OPERATION ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) .......................... 24 BASIC OPERATION Speakers to Be Used ................................................ 10 Speaker Placement .................................................. 11 Connecting the Speakers ......................................... 12 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 60 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 61 2 LOW FRQ TEST ................................................ 65 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) ..................................................... 65 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 66 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) .......... 66 6 INPUT RENAME ............................................... 66 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................. 67 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 68 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) .............. 68 10LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 68 11D-RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 69 12SP DELAY .......................................................... 69 13DISPLAY SET .................................................... 70 14MEMORY GUARD ............................................ 71 156CH INPUT SET ................................................ 71 16ZONE2 SET ........................................................ 72 Zone 2 Connections ................................................. 75 Remote Control in Zone 2 ....................................... 76 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................. 29 Input Modes and Indications ................................... 31 Selecting a Sound Field Program ............................ 32 Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 ............................................................. 33 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ................................................................. 35 What Is a Sound Field? ........................................... 77 Sound Field Program Parameters ............................ 77 Changing Parameter Settings .................................. 78 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ....... 78 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS .............................................. 79 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... 83 GLOSSARY .......................................................... 88 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 90 English Understanding Sound Fields ................................... 35 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 35 CINEMA-DSP ........................................................ 35 Straight Decode ....................................................... 36 Sound Field Effect ................................................... 36 Features of DSP Programs ...................................... 37 Table of Program Names for Each Input Format .... 40 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING .......................................................... 77 TUNING ................................................................ 41 Automatic and Manual Tuning ................................ 41 Presetting Stations ................................................... 42 Tuning in to a Preset Station ................................... 44 Exchanging Preset Stations ..................................... 44 BASIC RECORDING .......................................... 45 1 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 1 02.7.24, 6:04 PM FEATURES Built-in 8-Channel Power Amplifier Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.02% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Main: 130 W + 130 W Center: 130 W Rear: 130 W + 130 W Rear center: 130 W (0.05% THD, 1 kHz, 8 Ω) Front effect: 25 W + 25 W ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 16 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Video Signal Conversion (S Video ↔ Composite Video) Capability for Monitor Out ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes and “Learning” Macro Capability ◆ PROCESSOR DIRECT for no alteration of the original signal ◆ Custom Installation Facility Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic Decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX Decoder ◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS 96/ 24, DTS Neo: 6 Decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ◆ Automatic Preset Tuning ◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the purpose of the improvement in operativity and others. In this case the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo: 6” are trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 2 02.8.21, 6:58 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Remote control Batteries (LR6) × 3 AM loop antenna Power Cord (U.S.A. model only) MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER B PHONO PREPARATION 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE – SEARCH POWER REC 10KEY DSP EX/ES SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT HALL 1 CHAPTER + STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A. model only) Indoor FM antenna (Australia model only) MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST BASIC OPERAIONT SET MENU 3 After new batteries are correctly inserted, press the RESET button in the battery compartment using a ball point pen or similar object. (This does not clear the contents of the memory.) Insert three supplied batteries (LR6) in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. • Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the operating range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. English Open the battery compartment cover. ■ Notes on batteries APPENDIX 1 2 Replace the cover as pressing until it snaps into place. 3 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RESET button 4 ADVANCED OPERATION Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY EDIT CD VCR2 /DVR PHONES A/B/C/D/E TUNER PHONO STEREO PROGRAM 6CH INPUT TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – – + BASS + REC OUT /ZONE 2 TREBLE EFFECT VIDEO AUX PRESET /TUNING EDIT 7 8 9 0 q w e r t y ui o p FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM a TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO sd 1 STANDBY/ON 6 VOLUME Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. 2 INPUT selector 7 PHONES jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks or to the speakers. (There is an exception depending on the “1H SP B SET” setting on the SET MENU.) Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 8 BASS EXTENSION 3 (INPUT) MODE Turns on or off the BASS EXTENSION function at each time the button is pressed, this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks of this unit (see page 31). Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. 4 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 5 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 9 PROCESSOR DIRECT Turns on or off the PROCESSOR DIRECT function at each time the button is pressed. When this is on, BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of the original signal. 4 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 4 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 0 SPEAKERS A/B q BASS p PRESET/TUNING EDIT Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset station number and tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. w TREBLE a FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. s MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. Note e REC OUT/ZONE 2 r STEREO/EFFECT When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. When you are not using them, close the door. NAT URA L SOU ND AV REC EIVE R RXV33 00 D I G I T A L ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door ADVANCED OPERATION Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independent of the source you are listening to or watching in the main room. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. BASIC OPERAIONT • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. d TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up. PREPARATION Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. o VIDEO AUX jacks Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. INTRODUCTION Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time its corresponding button is pressed. (Depending on the “1H SP B SET” setting on the SET MENU, the output from each speaker varies when SPEAKER B is set to on.) t A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). y PROGRAM l / h Selects the DSP program. u 6CH INPUT To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. APPENDIX Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). i PRESET/TUNING l / h English Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears next to the band indication on the front panel display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. 5 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 5 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the controls and their functions of the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 46 to 59 for operating other components with this remote control. 1 2 3 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 4 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 5 SYSTEM POWER 3 MACRO TRANSMIT 4 5 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD y u i o p a 6CH INPUT s TITLE 6 SOURCE SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH POWER CHAPTER + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 6 Display window Shows the selected source component that you are controlling. 7 SOURCE SELECT k/n Selects the another component to control independently from the input that has been selected by pressing an input selector button. 8 LIGHT Turn the light on or off. When you press this button once, the light turns on for about ten seconds. Press again to turn off the light. ENTER 7 8 Turns on the power of this unit. 9 10KEY/DSP Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode. 9 10KEY DSP 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 0 q EX/ES 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E MUTE VOLUME CH TV VOL STEREO TV MUTE DISC d Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for operating your other components selected by the input selector buttons. f q EX/ES g Turns on or off the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder with 10 KEY/DSP set to the DSP position. h w LEVEL j Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. k e ON SCREEN SELECT PRESET TV INPUT w e /DTS SUR. 0 Operation buttons EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU r Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. t l r SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. t TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. y CLEAR Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, and set manufacturer codes (see pages 52 and 53). 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 RE-NAME Used for changing the input source name in the display window (see page 49). u LEARN Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for programming the functions of other remote controls (see pages 47 to 49). 6 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 6 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS i MACRO Used to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see pages 51 and 52). Using the Remote Control Turns the macro function on and off. INTRODUCTION o MACRO ON/OFF VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L p Å and ı STANDBY /ON INPUT Switch the control area for the extra components that are not connected to this unit without changing the input. a Input selector buttons MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT EDIT TUNER CD PHONO STEREO TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – + BASS – + TREBLE REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT VIDEO AUX 30° 30° Approximately 6 m (20 feet) Select the input source and change the control area. Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. d DSP program/Numeric buttons Select DSP programs or numbers according to the position of 10KEY/DSP. f MUTE g VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. h STEREO/EFFECT • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. j PARAMETER/SET MENU ADVANCED OPERATION Switches the normal stereo or DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel input signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are also directed to the main left and right speakers. ■ Handling the remote control BASIC OPERAIONT Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. PREPARATION s 6CH INPUT Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode. k Cursor buttons k/n/–/+ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select and adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/ SET MENU. l Cover Slides down to use the various setup buttons. Slides up when these buttons are not being used. APPENDIX English 7 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 7 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 2 1 V AUX DSP EX 3 VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DVD MD/TAPE CD R DTS Neo:6 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC MOVIE TV THEATER 12 ENTERTAINMENT TUNER 6 CD 7 89 PHONO STEREO AUTO TUNED MEMORY MUTE SLEEP BASS P. DIRECT 0 VOLUME 96/24 ft mS dB SP AB 96KHz /24bit q D TV/LD 5 SILENT PRO LOGIC / PCM CBL/SAT ES DISCRETE MATRIX VIRTUAL DIGITAL 4 wer t y u i o LFE L C R RL RC RR p a s 1 DSP indicator Lights up when you select a digital sound field program. r Headphones indicator 2 Decoder indicators t DSP program indicators When any of the decoders equipped on this unit functions, the indicator lights up. The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2, TV THEATER or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. 3 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP (see page 34). 4 Input source indicator Shows the current input source with a cursor. Lights up when headphones are connected. y Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. u STEREO indicator 5 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 6 BASS indicator i TUNED indicator Lights up while BASS EXTENSION is on. 7 SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. 8 MUTE indicator Lights up while the MUTE function is on. 9 96/24 indicator Lights up when the DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. 0 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. q indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. PCM Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. o MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. p P. DIRECT Lights up while PROCESSOR DIRECT is on. a Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. s LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. w SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected with the sound effect (see “SILENT CINEMA DSP” on page 34). e SP A B indicator Lights up according to which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. 8 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 8 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 3 2 AUDIO AUDIO L R DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE OPTICAL VIDEO VIDEO L R IN (PLAY) 4 COMPONENT VIDEO D-TV /LD CD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT RC-232C R CBL /SAT R IN CBL /SAT PHONO PB Y REMOTE PRE OUT/MAIN IN R + – – + AC IN AC OUTLETS L L R REAR (SURROUND) OUT AM ANT + IN – – + IN GND MAIN REAR OUT CENTER (SURROUND) SURROUND D-TV /LD REAR CENTER 1 SUB WOOFER 2 REAR CENTER R + – – + R + – – + L 75Ω UNBAL. COAXIAL ZONE 2 OUT CENTER MAIN SUB WOOFER B CENTER ZONE 2 OUT FRONT REAR CENTER REAR CENTER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER ZONE 2 OUT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER FRONT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER A + B : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER IN MONITOR OUT GND IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON SELECTEUR D'INPEDANCE OUT FM ANT DIGITAL INPUT L TUNER VCR 2 /DVR CD + PREPARATION CD – FRONT EFFECT VCR 1 DVD – FRONT EFFECT PR OUT (REC) L ZONE 2 OUT + MONITOR OUT CD-R OPTICAL + DVD MD/TAPE OUT (REC) 7 6 SPEAKERS –– + S VIDEO DVD CD-R CD-R 5 INTRODUCTION 1 VIDEO L MAIN S VIDEO OUT 6CH INPUT +12V 15mA MAX. A L R 8 9 0 q w 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 2 Audio component jacks 3 Video component jacks See pages 15 to 17 for connection information. 4 RS-232C r (U.S.A. model) q Antenna input terminals See page 20 for connection information. w REMOTE IN/OUT jacks See page 75 for details. CONTROL OUT jacks This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. e PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks See page 21 for connection information. 5 Speaker terminals r IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance (see page 14). Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch. 6 AC OUTLETS Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 22). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION These are control expansion terminals for commercial use. Consult your dealer for details. See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. ADVANCED OPERATION See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. e BASIC OPERAIONT CONTROL OUT 7 AC INLET (U.S.A. model only) APPENDIX Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 22). 8 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 9 6CH INPUT jacks See page 21 for connection information. 0 ZONE 2 OUT jacks See page 75 for details. English 9 0102V3300_1-9_EN(UA) 9 02.7.24, 6:05 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speakers to Be Used This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with an 8-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers, left and right front effect speakers and a center and rear center speakers. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The front effect speakers are used for the effect sound. If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. CAUTION Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with a monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. 10 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 10 02.7.24, 6:05 PM SPEAKER SETUP Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. INTRODUCTION Front effect speaker (R) Center speaker Rear speaker (R) Front effect speaker (L) Main speaker (R) PREPARATION 1.8 m (6 feet) BASIC OPERATION Subwoofer Rear center speaker Main speaker (L) Rear speaker (L) ■ Rear center speaker Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. ■ Center speaker ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. Place the front effect speakers about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 feet) outside the main speakers and in front of the room, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. APPENDIX Note • If you do not use any effect speakers (rear, front effect, center and/or rear center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items in the SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers to. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. ■ Front effect speakers ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Main speakers English 11 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 11 02.7.24, 6:05 PM SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the Speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 1 Banana plug 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. y • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. 12 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 12 02.7.24, 6:05 PM SPEAKER SETUP AUDIO L IN (PLAY) OPTICAL VIDEO VIDEO L COMPONENT VIDEO PHONO PB Y REMOTE L AC IN AC OUTLETS PRE OUT/MAIN IN + R – – + L FRONT EFFECT R L REAR (SURROUND) OUT AM ANT + IN – – + IN MAIN GND REAR OUT CENTER (SURROUND) SURROUND D-TV /LD REAR CENTER 1 SUB WOOFER 2 REAR CENTER + – – + L ZONE 2 OUT R + – – + L MAIN SUB WOOFER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER ZONE 2 OUT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER FRONT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER A + B : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER IN MONITOR OUT CENTER B CENTER ZONE 2 OUT FRONT REAR CENTER REAR CENTER MAIN A OR B BASIC OPERATION R 75Ω UNBAL. COAXIAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON SELECTEUR D'INPEDANCE OUT FM ANT GND + TUNER VCR 2 /DVR DIGITAL INPUT – PREPARATION CBL /SAT – FRONT EFFECT IN VCR 1 CD L ZONE 2 OUT + R PR OUT (REC) DVD R CBL /SAT MONITOR OUT CBL /SAT OPTICAL + RS-232C CD-R CD-R SPEAKERS –– Left DVD D-TV /LD IN (PLAY) Right + S VIDEO DVD OUT (REC) CD Left MD/TAPE CD-R CD R Right INTRODUCTION AUDIO R DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE Rear speaker Front Effect speaker Subwoofer system VIDEO MAIN S VIDEO OUT 6CH INPUT +12V 15mA MAX. A R L CONTROL OUT (U.S.A. model) Left Right Main B speaker Left Main A speaker Rear Center speaker ADVANCED OPERATION Right Center speaker ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. ■ REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals. APPENDIX ■ FRONT EFFECT SPEAKERS terminals A front effect speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ SUBWOOFER jack Note • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 13 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 13 02.7.24, 6:05 PM English When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise this unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the upper or lower position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON SELECTEUR D'INPEDANCE ZONE 2 OUT FRONT REAR CENTER REAR CENTER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER ZONE 2 OUT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER FRONT : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER A + B : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER Switch position Speaker Impedance level + L + L AC IN AC OUTLETS FRONT EFFECT + L REAR (SURROUND) Zone 2 The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Front Effect The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. + CENTER IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON SELECTEUR D'INPEDANCE + L + L B ZONE 2 OUT : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER FRONT : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER CENTER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER ZONE 2 OUT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER FRONT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER A + B : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. [Australia model] The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. MAIN A Upper (U.S.A. model) Center The impedance must be 4 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 4 Ω or higher. [Australia model] The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Zone 2 The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front Effect The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Lower Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. [U.S.A. model] The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 14 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 14 02.8.21, 6:59 PM CONNECTIONS CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can be converted to composite signals inside of this unit and output through the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks on this unit as well. • The signals input through the VIDEO jack on this unit can be output through the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack by setting “V CONV.” in “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU to ON (see page 70). • When signals input through both S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack has priority. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 67 for details). ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console and a camcorder to this unit. VIDEO Connecting Video Components L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX S V L R O ■ About the video jacks OPTICAL OUT There are three types of video jacks. AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT ADVANCED OPERATION VIDEO jacks transmit composite signals. Game console or video camera S VIDEO jack S VIDEO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION S VIDEO jacks transmit S-video signals. S-video signals are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks COMPONENT VIDEO PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO jacks transmit component signals. Component signals are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. APPENDIX PR English The signal input through these jacks are output through the MONITOR OUT jacks of the same type. Make sure to connect the correct jacks of the same type on your video component and the video monitor. 15 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 15 BASIC OPERATION S VIDEO VIDEO jack PREPARATION • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • Use commercially available video pin cables when connecting to the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. y INTRODUCTION Before Connecting Components 7/26/02, 5:46 PM CONNECTIONS OPTICAL OUTPUT DVD player COMPONENT OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT L O S VIDEO OUTPUT V R V V V S (U.S.A. model) AUDIO L R DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO L R IN (PLAY) OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO DVD DVD RS-232C MD/TAPE CD-R OUT (REC) D-TV /LD CD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT CBL /SAT MONITOR OUT PR CD-R OUT (REC) CD-R PB Y REMOTE IN OPTICAL DVD CD OUT CBL /SAT PHONO IN IN GND VCR 2 /DVR MAIN REAR OUT FM ANT SURROUND 1 SUB WOOFER 2 REAR CENTER 75Ω UNBAL. COAXIAL ZONE 2 OUT IN MONITOR OUT CENTER GND (SURROUND) OUT D-TV /LD DIGITAL INPUT L R TUNER AM ANT CD PRE OUT/MAI FRONT EFFEC VCR 1 MAIN SUB WOOFER VIDEO S VIDEO OUT 6CH INPUT +12V 15mA MAX. L R CONTROL OUT L C R S V VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT S V S VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT TV/digital TV or LD player indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables V indicates video cables S V indicates component video cables V indicates S-video cables 16 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 16 S VIDEO INPUT COMPONENT INPUT V L V Video monitor COAXIAL OUTPUT indicates signal direction V 02.7.24, 6:05 PM V CONNECTIONS OPTICAL OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT L O MD/ TAPE AUDIO L IN (PLAY) OPTICAL DVD RS-232C MD/TAPE OUT (REC) D-TV /LD CD IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT CBL /SAT MONITOR OUT PR CD-R PB Y REMOTE IN FRONT EFFEC R VCR 1 OPTICAL DVD CD OUT CBL /SAT PHONO IN IN GND VCR 2 /DVR REAR OUT (SURROUND) OUT FM ANT SURROUND D-TV /LD 1 SUB WOOFER 2 REAR CENTER 75Ω UNBAL. ZONE 2 OUT IN MONITOR OUT CENTER GND ADVANCED OPERATION COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT L TUNER AM ANT MAIN PRE OUT/MAI BASIC OPERATION OUT (REC) CD V S VIDEO DVD CD-R CD-R V COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO L R V S PREPARATION AUDIO R DIGITAL OUTPUT COMPONENT OUTPUT S VIDEO OUTPUT V R INTRODUCTION Cable TV or Satellite tuner MAIN SUB WOOFER S VIDEO VIDEO OUT 6CH INPUT +12V 15mA MAX. R L CONTROL OUT (U.S.A. model) R L R V VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT S V S S V VIDEO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT S VIDEO OUTPUT Video monitor VIDEO INPUT S VIDEO INPUT indicates left audio pin cables indicates right audio pin cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video pin cables indicates component video cables V English R COMPONENT INPUT V V S V S VIDEO INPUT indicates signal direction L V APPENDIX VCR 1 or VCR 2/ DVR (digital video recorder) V ADDITIONAL INFORMATION L indicates S-video cables 17 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 17 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. y • You can designate the input for each digital jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 67 for details). About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks. • When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape deck or CD recorder y • DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. Note • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. Notes • DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog OUT (REC) jacks are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 18 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 18 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONNECTIONS INPUT OPTICAL INPUT INTRODUCTION MD recorder or tape deck OUTPUT L O R L R OPTICAL INPUT PREPARATION AUDIO R DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE OPTICAL OUTPUT MD/TAPE INPUT OUT (REC) CD-R CD player CD recorder L IN (PLAY) O OPTICAL OUTPUT L IN (PLAY) CD O R O L CD-R R OUTPUT BASIC OPERATION OUT (REC) CD-R OPTICAL DVD CD CBL /SAT PHONO OPTICAL OUTPUT L R CD C MAIN COAXIAL OUTPUT SURROUND D-TV /LD DIGITAL INPUT CENTER GND ADVANCED OPERATION COAXIAL SUB WOOFER 6CH INPUT L R L GND R L SURROUND OUTPUT OUTPUT R MAIN OUTPUT External decoder See page 21 APPENDIX SUBWOOFER OUTPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (U.S.A. model) CENTER OUTPUT Turntable indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables English L 19 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 19 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Release the tab to fix the lead wires. COMPONENT VIDEO DEO DVD CBL /SAT MONITOR OUT PR PB REM TUNER AM ANT IN GND OU FM ANT 1 75Ω UNBAL. 2 O +12V 15mA CON O Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. y • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. • Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. 20 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 20 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting to an External Amplifier Notes Note • The signals output through these jacks are affected by the BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION settings. PREPARATION • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • No signals will be output from any other PRE OUT jacks than the MAIN jacks when SPEAKER A is turned off with ZONE B selected for “1H SP B SET” on the SET MENU. 5 MAIN jacks IN: Line input to this unit’s main channel amplifiers. When connecting to these jacks, signals input to the preamplifier of this unit will not be output from the main amplifier of this unit. OUT: Main channel line output jacks. 6 CENTER jack Center channel line output jack. PRE OUT/MAIN IN FRONT EFFECT 2 Connecting to the 6CH INPUT Jacks L R 1 REAR (SURROUND) 4 5 SUB WOOFER 6 CENTER REAR CENTER This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. IN MAIN OUT L R Front effect channel line output jacks. 2 REAR (SURROUND) jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 3 SUBWOOFER jack ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack if they are assigned to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • When 6CH INPUT is selected, the signals input to the 6CH INPUT jacks have priority over any other input source. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET (1A to 1E)” on the SET MENU do not apply. • When headphones are used, only main L/R channels are output. The setting for “6CH INPUT SET” on the SET MENU will not be applied. • Setting for “15 6CH INPUT SET” on the SET MENU will be applied when 6CH INPUT is selected. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 FRONT EFFECT jacks Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. BASIC OPERATION 3 INTRODUCTION If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks as follows. 4 REAR CENTER jack Rear center channel line output jack. Notes APPENDIX • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 73). • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” and “10 LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. English 21 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 21 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the Power Supply Cords To AC outlet ■ Connecting the AC power cord [U.S.A. model] Plug the power cord into the AC inlet when all connections are complete, and then plug in this unit to the wall outlet. AC IN AC OUTLETS Caution • Do not use other AC power cords than the one provided. Otherwise it may result in causing fire or an electrical shock. ECTOR WER ON EDANCE MIN./SPEAKER MIN./SPEAKER MIN./SPEAKER MIN./SPEAKER MIN./SPEAKER MIN./SPEAKER ZONE 2 OUT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER FRONT : 6ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 4ΩMIN./SPEAKER A + B : 8ΩMIN./SPEAKER [Australia model] Plug this unit into the wall outlet. Plug in the other components connected to this unit to the wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.S.A. model ................................................ 2 OUTLETS Australia model .............................................. 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W. (U.S.A. model) 22 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 22 02.7.24, 6:05 PM CONNECTIONS Turning on the Power INTRODUCTION When all connections are completed, turn on the power of this unit. 1 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE B A/B/C/D/E VCR 1 PRESET /TUNING 6CH INPUT EDIT CD VCR2 /DVR PHONES PRESET/ TUNING PROGRAM TUNER CBL/SAT BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT PHONO STEREO FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PREPARATION /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD CD–R D–TV/LD SILENT MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – + BASS – + EFFECT REC OUT /ZONE 2 TREBLE VIDEO AUX MACRO TRANSMIT 1 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR POWER B OFF ON PHONO CD DVD 6CH INPUT BASIC OPERATION TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER 1 – SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Remote control Front panel 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 23 0103V3300_10-23_EN(UA) 23 02.7.24, 6:05 PM ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. y • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU (see page 70). OSD Modes You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor. Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. Selecting the OSD Mode 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU If the video monitor is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit, the OSD can be shown only when operating the SET MENU. However, the OSD cannot be superimposed over the image. Notes • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. • The OSD signal output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks is created from the composite or Svideo signal. Therefore, the quality of the OSD signal may vary depending on the signal input through the VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks. P01 CONCERT HALL 1 Europe Hall A ≥ DSP LEVEL…………0dB INIT.DLY…………30ms ROOM SIZE…………1.O LIVENESS…………………5 P01 CONCERT HALL 1 Full display Short display y • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. 24 0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 24 02.7.24, 6:05 PM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1H Description Control value (default setting indicated in bold) Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1B MAIN SP Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main speakers. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers are being used and their performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1D REAR CT SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not a rear center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1E LFE/BASS OUT Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass signal. 1F FRONT EFCT SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not front effect speakers are being used. 1G MAIN LEVEL Selects the main speaker level. Normal/–10 dB 1H SP B SET Select the location of the main speakers to be connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. MAIN / ZONE B BASIC OPERAIONT 1A CENTER SP PREPARATION Item INTRODUCTION This unit has 8 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change settings following the steps described in “1 SPEAKER SET” from pages 61 to 64. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH ADVANCED OPERATION YES/NONE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 25 0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 25 7/26/02, 5:47 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. The “TEST DOLBY SUR.” is for balancing the output levels of the six speakers required for surround sound systems. The “TEST DSP” is for balancing the front effect speakers with the main speakers for the DSP sound field programs. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, and various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic , DTS, DTS ES, and DTS Neo: 6). The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. 3 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT – + – BASS 4 Note • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position and turn off BASS EXTENSION and PROCESSOR DIRECT by pressing the buttons. “BASS EXT. OFF” and “P. DIRECT OFF” appear on the front panel display. + TREBLE Set to OFF. Set PARAMETER/SET MENU on the remote control to PARAMETER. PARAMETER SET MENU TEST DOLBY SUR. Select “TEST DOLBY SUR.” to match the output levels of the center, rear center and left and right rear speakers to the left and right main speakers. Before You Begin A/B/C/D/E VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 PRESET TV INPUT D I G I T A L TV VOL MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC 2 EFFECT STANDBY /ON PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT FM/AM MEMORY EDIT TUNER VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT PHONO STEREO 1, 4 TUNING MODE 3 MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO CD VCR2 /DVR PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – + – BASS + TREBLE REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT VIDEO AUX 2 3 3 A/B/C/D/E TEST Adjust the volume so you can hear the test tone. EFFECT PARAMETER LEVEL 2 VOLUME STEREO DISC SLEEP SET MENU 4 VOLUME 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A B 26 0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) TEST MUTE CH TV MUTE ON SCREEN Press TEST to output the test tone. PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL 1 26 02.7.24, 6:05 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT CONNECTIONS LEVELS LEFT CENTER RIGHT SURROUND REAR CENTER TEST DOLBY SUR. LEFT • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source with the desired volume by adjusting the volume key. • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear and right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1G MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 64). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1G MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. ADVANCED OPERATION Front panel display also indicates from which speaker the test tone is output in the order of TEST LEFT→TEST CENTER→TEST RIGHT→ TEST R SUR.→TEST REAR CNTR→TEST L SUR. →TEST SUBWOOFER y BASIC OPERAIONT The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker, rear center speaker, left rear speaker and subwoofer in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • If “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the output level of the rear right, left and center speakers cannot be adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→SUBWOOFER→LEFT..., skipping the rear right and left speakers and the rear center speaker. • If “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the output level of the rear center speaker cannot be adjusted in step 3. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→LEFT SURROUND→SUBWOOFER→LEFT ..., skipping the rear center speaker. • If “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the output level of the subwoofer cannot be adjusted. The test tone will be circulated in the order of LEFT→CENTER→ RIGHT→RIGHT SURROUND→REAR CENTER→LEFT SURROUND→LEFT…, skipping the subwoofer. PREPARATION LEFT SURROUND Notes INTRODUCTION SUBWOOFER RIGHT Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. 3 APPENDIX Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the effect speakers so that the output level coming from each speaker is the same. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. Note • Main L/R speaker level cannot be adjusted by itself. Use VOLUME to adjust the main volume. 4 TEST English When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. To enter the “TEST DSP” mode, press TEST once. To stop the test tone, press TEST twice. 27 0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 27 02.7.24, 6:05 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. TEST DSP Select “TEST DSP” to match the output levels of the front effect speakers to the main speakers. TEST DSP Note • You cannot enter the “TEST DSP” mode if “1F FRONT EFCT SP” is set to NONE. MAIN A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC 2 EFFECT Front panel display also indicates from which speaker the test tone is output as follows: TEST MAIN → TEST FRONT → TEST MAIN → … PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 1, 4 3 Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. 1 Press TEST repeatedly to output the test tone. 2 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test tone. TEST 3 VOLUME Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the front effect speakers so that the output level coming from each speaker is the same. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the front effect speaker. Note FRONT FRONT LEFT RIGHT • Main L/R speaker level cannot be adjusted by itself. Use VOLUME to adjust the main volume. 4 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. TEST y The test tone is heard alternately from the front effect speakers and main speakers. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. Press k to hear the test tone from the front effect L speaker, and n to hear the test tone from the front effect R speaker. • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker level once it is set as long as you do not change the speakers. You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source with the desired volume by adjusting the volume key. • You can increase the output levels of the front effect speakers to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1G MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 64). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about onethird of the normal level. After you have set “1G MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. 28 0104V3300_24-28_EN(UA) 28 02.7.24, 6:05 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 4 6 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO CD VCR2 /DVR PHONO STEREO Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The current input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor for a few seconds. TUNING MODE FM/AM MEMORY EDIT TUNER VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT PHONES 4 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PHONO V–AUX – – + BASS INTRODUCTION 1 + TREBLE REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT VIDEO AUX 6 3 6 74 TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD INPUT Front panel 7 MACRO TRANSMIT 1 RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD 10KEY DSP D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER ROCK CONCERT EX/ES 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 4 A/B/C/D/E 7 /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC 6 V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 ENTER POWER 10KEY DSP SOUND MENU SEARCH – CHAPTER D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R DVD SP A SOURCE DISPLAY CBL/SAT TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME EFFECT AUTO L R + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB Selected input source Note 1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. SYSTEM POWER or Front panel 2 3 Remote control • The input source names correspond to the jack names on the rear panel of this unit, not the names of the component connected to this unit. To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. SPEAKERS A B 6CH INPUT or Front panel Remote control ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. The speaker indicator(s) for the selected set(s) lights up on the front panel display. 6CH INPUT ADVANCED OPERATION STANDBY /ON BASIC OPERATION TITLE SELECT Remote control PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL 6CH INPUT PREPARATION or V-AUX Notes APPENDIX • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH INPUT. English 29 0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 29 02.7.24, 6:05 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Note • If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. This selection for BGV cannot be made with INPUT on the front panel. PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD VOLUME or Front panel ■ BGV (background video) function Remote control If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. BASS EXTENSION MUTE y – + BASS – + TREBLE Notes • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered for the characteristics of AV receivers. In this case, turn on the component. • BASS EXTENSION may not be effective if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 7 Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 35 to 39 for details about the DSP program. 10KEY DSP PROGRAM or EX/ES CHP/INDEX Front panel HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. STANDBY STANDBY /ON or JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOLUME +/–. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. • When this unit enters the standby mode, the mute function will be cancelled. Front panel 8 SELECT Remote control 30 0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 30 02.7.24, 6:05 PM Remote control BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on the digital signal Input Modes and Indications When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page 68 for details). PHONO or MODE V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT Remote control D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO AUTO VOLUME L R Input mode Notes APPENDIX • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack has precedence over the OPTICAL jack. • In playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing the LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up.) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed while the DTS source is playing back with the input mode set to AUTO. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. ADVANCED OPERATION AUTO: ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs BASIC OPERATION Front panel • Sound effect will be added to the signals after converting the sampling frequency to 48 kHz or below. • When the sound effect is turned off by pressing STEREO/ EFFECT, this unit reproduces sound in 2-channel stereo at the sampling frequency of the input signal. PREPARATION Press (INPUT) MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor. The digital input jacks of this unit can handle up to a 96 kHz sampling digital signal. However when inputting a higher digital signal than 48 kHz, be aware of the following points. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with various input jacks. You can set the priority of the input signal among different types of input signals. y English • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page 68 for details). 31 0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 31 02.7.24, 6:05 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a Sound Field Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. There are 11 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However the selection depends on the input signal format and not all the sub-programs are possible for all input signal formats. For details about each program, see pages 35 to 39. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. For example, to select the sub-program “70 mm Sci-Fi”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. 10KEY DSP EX/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 8 /DTS SUR. SELECT VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON INPUT Program name MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD CD–R D–TV/LD B SILENT PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT EDIT TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CD VCR2 /DVR PHONES PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PHONO STEREO FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE V AUX MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP + BASS – CBL/SAT D TV/LD MOVIE V–AUX – DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME THEATER 1 + REC OUT /ZONE 2 TREBLE EFFECT VIDEO AUX PRO LOGIC / SP A 70mm Sci-Fi L R Sub-program name 2 1 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 7 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 CHP/INDEX 8 /DTS SUR. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 9–11) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, PRO LOGIC Movie, or Neo: 6 Cinema, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. 2,3 SELECT 11 12 +10 0 A/B/C/D/E JAZZ CLUB ENTERTAINMENT 1 ROCK CONCERT EX/ES CHURCH +100 PRESET TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH TV VOL STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT 1 Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP on the remote control. 2 Press PROGRAM l / h (one of the DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. 10KEY DSP 10KEY DSP PROGRAM or EX/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. y • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT CHP/INDEX Front panel CHURCH SELECT ■ DTS 96/24 Remote control Program name V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DSP CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME MOVIE THEATER 1 PRO LOGIC / 96KHz /24Bit SP A 70mm Spectacle Sub-program name L R • Select DTS DIGITAL SUR/Normal among CINEMA DSP programs or press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound effect in order to decode the DTS 96/24 signal. DTS 96/24 decoder does not function in other cases. • When the sound effect is turned off by pressing STEREO/EFFECT, this unit plays the DTS 96/24 signal in 2-channel stereo at the sampling frequency 96 kHz. • Press EX/ES for matrix 6.1 playback. However, the DTS 96/24 decoder does not function during matrix 6.1 playback. • 96KHz /24bit indicator lights up while the DTS 96/24 decoder functions. 32 0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 32 02.7.24, 6:05 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 4 Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L • When PRO LOGIC is selected Movie↔ Music • When Neo: 6 is selected Cinema ↔ Music STANDBY /ON 10KEY DSP INPUT MODE SPEAKERS SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD CD–R D–TV/LD B SILENT VCR 1 FM/AM MEMORY EDIT PHONO STEREO S VIDEO 6CH INPUT PROGRAM TUNING MODE EX/ES VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO CD VCR2 /DVR PHONES PRESET /TUNING TUNER CBL/SAT BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. SELECT V–AUX – + – BASS + EFFECT REC OUT /ZONE 2 TREBLE VIDEO AUX ■ Playing the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES software Press EX/ES to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder to listen to the Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES software with a rear center speaker. 2 10KEY DSP EX/ES HALL 2 CHURCH 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 6 7 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E TV VOL 3 SELECT EX/ES MUTE CHP/INDEX VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC 2 8 /DTS SUR. PRESET TV INPUT 1 JAZZ CLUB 1 MOVIE THEATER 1 EFFECT Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. PROGRAM Front panel EX/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 8 /DTS SUR. SELECT Remote control VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD DOLBY PRO LOGIC / 3 MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO P R O L O G I C II SP A VOLUME PRO LOGIC DSP L R 10KEY DSP EX/ES CHP/INDEX HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME LFE SP A Matrix 6.1 L C R RL RC RR (Example: when playing the Dolby Digital EX software) Press EX/ES to select the mode. (The modes that can be selected vary depending on the format of the software to play.) AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the input source that this unit can detect. If the input source has no signal (flag) that this unit can detect (“AUTO:OFF” is displayed.), press EX/ES to select “Matrix 6.1”. Discrete 6.1: This mode can be selected only when the source with DTS ES Discrete format has been detected. (The DISCRETE indicator lights up.) If the source switches to other sources with rear left and right channels during playback, this unit reproduces those sources through the Matrix decoder. (Either EX or MATRIX indicator lights up.) Matrix 6.1: This mode makes 6-channel playback of the input source with Matrix or Matrix compatible format through the Matrix 6.1 EX or MATRIX decoder. (Either indicator lights up.) OFF: The Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder does not work in this mode. JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. VCR 1 DIGITAL 8 SELECT 33 0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) 33 02.7.24, 6:05 PM English Select a decoder. Press SELECT to select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6. EX APPENDIX V AUX VCR2/DVR DSP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (Operating using the remote control) Press V/DTS SUR. on the remote control. The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. V AUX ADVANCED OPERATION (Operating using the front panel) Select a decoder and subprogram. Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly to select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC , or Neo: 6. 10KEY DSP BASIC OPERATION 2,4 HALL 1 ROCK CONCERT PREPARATION A HALL 1 INTRODUCTION You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five or six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC or Neo: 6 in the program No. 11. Select a subprogram suitable for the source. The selection switches as follows each time V/DTS SUR. is pressed. • When PRO LOGIC is selected Normal ↔ Enhanced BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction Notes • The DTS 96/24 decoder and the DTS ES decoder cannot be activated at the same time while playing the DTS 96/24 signal. When “AUTO” is selected, the DTS 96/24 decoder has precedence over the DTS ES decoder. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in the following cases: – When “1C REAR L/R SP”is set to “NONE”. – When the sound effect is turned off. – When the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain rear L/R channel signals. – When Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When headphones are connected. – When “8ch Stereo” is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP With the Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all the DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates the virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP program by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. Notes • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 8ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic , DTS Normal or Neo: 6 program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. • When over 48 kHz sampling digital signal is being input, this unit reproduces sound in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode after converting the sampling frequency to 48 kHz or below. ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP You can enjoy the powerful sound field as if there were actual speakers with the SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (If the sound effect is off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. STEREO STEREO or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Notes • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to “SMALL” and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”, or “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH”, the LFE signals will be output from the subwoofer. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “11 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. ■ Displaying the information about the input source During the stereo reproduction, you can display the information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the component connected to this unit. (During playback) 1 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. 2 Press k/n to display the information about the input signal. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, this unit is not set in the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode even if the sound effect is on. • When over 48 kHz sampling digital signal is being input, this unit reproduces sound in the CINEMA DSP mode after converting the sampling frequency to 48 kHz or below. 34 34 PARAMETER SET MENU Notes 0105V3300_29-34_EN(UA) Remote control 7/26/02, 5:49 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) PREPARATION A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. INTRODUCTION Understanding Sound Fields Hi-Fi DSP Programs BASIC OPERATION Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources in a full circle around the listener. CINEMA-DSP ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Filmmakers intend the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide the surround sound field. It recreates the most complete movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the right and left Main and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD EFFECT APPENDIX DIALOG MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD English 35 0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 35 02.7.24, 6:06 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Straight Decode This unit is equipped with various precise decoders; • • • • Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel reproduction of the original sound Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES decoder for an additional rear center channel DTS 96/24 decoder for the high quality playback of the DTS 96/24 signal at the sampling frequency 96 kHz. Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic /DTS Neo:6 decoder for multi-channel reproduction of 2-channel sources Select any of the STRAIGHT DECODE modes in Program 11 (except for the sub-program “Enhanced.”) to use any of these decoders for reproducing the original sound without any sound effects added. In this case, no DSP effect is applied and the DSP indicator turns off. Sound Field Effect The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTSequipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added. ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs for 2-channel sources are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field Surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Pro Logic /DTS Neo: 6 Dolby Pro Logic and DTS Neo: 6 equipped on this unit decode the 2-channel Dolby Surround software into five or six full range channels. They also provide two modes; MOVIE/CINEMA for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel sources. 36 0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 36 02.7.24, 6:06 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Features of DSP Programs Mode Type of sources This is a large fan-shaped concert hall in Munich which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. Europe Hall B This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with less than 2400 seats located in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual seat is in the center-right section on the first floor. U.S.A. Hall C This is a large 2600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully reinforced. Live Concert A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Prounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. Freiburg This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. Village Gate This is the sound field at a jazz club in New York. It is in a basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. The Roxy Theatre The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. Arena A classic shoe-box type concert hall. This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena. Hi-Fi DSP 3 CONCERT HALL 2 CHURCH For music sources 4 5 JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 37 0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 37 02.7.24, 6:06 PM English Europe Hall A APPENDIX CONCERT HALL 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 2 Features ADVANCED OPERATION Sub program BASIC OPERATION Program PREPARATION No. INTRODUCTION The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Hi-Fi DSP Mode DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Type of sources No. Program 6 ENTERTAINMENT Sub program Features Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 8ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. For music sources 6 ENTERTAINMENT Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 7 MUSIC VIDEO Pop/Rock This program produces an enthusiastic atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. Opera This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. For audiovideo sources TV THEATER CINEMA DSP 8 9 MOVIE THEATER 1 For movie programs 38 0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 38 02.7.24, 6:06 PM Mode DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Type of sources No. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. DOLBY DIGITAL Enhanced DTS DIGITAL SUR Enhanced PRO LOGIC Enhanced This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. For movie programs STRAIGHT DECODE 11 DOLBY DIGITAL Normal DTS DIGITAL SUR Normal PRO LOGIC Normal PRO LOGIC Movie The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, no DSP effect is applied. To reproduce 2 channel sources decoding into multichannels in each decoding mode. ADVANCED OPERATION General BASIC OPERATION This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. PREPARATION 11 Features Adventure CINEMA DSP MOVIE THEATER 2 Sub program INTRODUCTION 10 Program Music ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DTS Neo:6 Cinema Music APPENDIX English 39 0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 39 02.7.24, 6:06 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 9 10 11 DOLBY DIGITAL 2 channel Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL EX decoder: inactive (off) DOLBY DIGITAL EX decoder: active (on) DTS ES decoder: inactive (off) DTS ES decoder: active (on) 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle Spectacle EX DTS Spectacle Spectacle ES 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi Sci-Fi EX DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi ES 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure Adventure EX DTS Adventure Adventure ES 70 mm General DGTL General General EX DTS General General ES — Normal Dolby D EX — — — Enhanced EX Enhanced — — — — — Normal 96/24 Normal*3 ES Matrix 6.1*1 ES Dscrt 6.1 *2 — — — Enhanced Enhanced ES Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Cinema — — — — Music — — — — Program MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DGTL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC DTS Neo: 6 *1 means the DTS ES Matrix decoder is active. *2 means the DTS ES Discrete decoder is active. *3 means the DTS 96/24 decoder is active. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the EX/ES button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be selected. • EX/ES on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing 6.1 channel source with EX/ES on the remote control off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Note • The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting the program No. 11 except for the Enhanced mode. 40 0106V3300_35-40_EN(UA) 40 02.7.24, 6:06 PM TUNING There are 2 ways of tuning; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the same button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. PRESET/ TUNING VCR 1 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER TUNED CD AUTO VOLUME When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT FM/AM MEMORY EDIT TUNER y TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO CD PHONO STEREO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. OPTICAL V–AUX – + BASS – + TREBLE REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT VIDEO AUX If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. 4 32 3 Rotate INPUT (press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. PHONO TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” on left. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO INPUT Front panel 2 Remote control If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. PRESET /TUNING or Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. AUTO Lights up If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER TUNED EDIT SP A D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER 3 SP A CD AUTO A~~AM~1404 ~ Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. PRESET/ TUNING Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. Note • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. APPENDIX AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET /TUNING CBL/SAT TUNED EDIT TUNING MODE VCR 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FM/AM 3 Goes off AUTO/MAN'L MONO ADVANCED OPERATION or V-AUX 1 BASIC OPERATION ■ Manual tuning 1 PREPARATION A~~AM~1404 ~ SP A INTRODUCTION 4 Automatic and Manual Tuning CD AUTO A~~AM~1404 ~ English 41 0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 41 02.7.24, 6:06 PM TUNING y Presetting Stations ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 44). VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON INPUT A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B CBL/SAT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT EDIT TUNER VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CD VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO FM/AM MEMORY ■ Automatic preset tuning options TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – – + BASS + TREBLE REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT VIDEO AUX 132 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 43. MODE SPEAKERS SILENT 1 • When a station data is stored under a preset number, the frequency and reception band are also stored. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Exchanging Preset Stations” on page 44. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. 1. Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Automatically presetting stations” on left. 2. After pressing MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for about 3 seconds, press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/ TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 3. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP VOLUME AUTO MEMORY SP A A1:FM 87.5 MHz L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 42 0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 42 02.7.24, 6:06 PM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. D I G I T A L INTRODUCTION VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET/ TUNING STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT EDIT TUNER VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CD VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – – + BASS + TREBLE REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT VIDEO AUX V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME 34 1 SP A 2,5 5 Tune in to a station. See page 41 for tuning instructions. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP VOLUME TUNED SP A A :AM 630 kHz L R 630 kHz L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. MEMORY The station band and frequency MAN'L/AUTO FM appear on the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. SP A 630 kHz L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. 6 MEMORY MEMORY Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Flashes ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication. • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP ADVANCED OPERATION Notes MAN'L/AUTO FM 3 C3:AM BASIC OPERATION When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of received station. C3:AM PREPARATION TUNED MEMORY VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SP A C :AM 630 kHz L R APPENDIX English 43 0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 43 02.7.24, 6:06 PM TUNING TUNING Tuning in to a Preset Station Exchanging Preset Stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L VOLUME STANDBY /ON NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 D I G I T A L INPUT MODE STANDBY /ON SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT FM/AM MEMORY PHONO STEREO MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO CD VCR2 /DVR TUNING MODE INPUT EDIT TUNER VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT PHONES PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – – + BASS SPEAKERS + TREBLE A EFFECT REC OUT /ZONE 2 VIDEO AUX SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT A/B/C/D/E FM/AM MEMORY EDIT TUNER VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CD VCR2 /DVR PHONES PHONO STEREO TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – – + BASS + TREBLE EFFECT REC OUT /ZONE 2 VIDEO AUX 12 1,3 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 EX/ES CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT 7 6 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. *2 *1 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. 2 EFFECT *1 These buttons can be used to directly select the preset group (A to E from left to right). *2 These buttons can be used to directly select the preset station number 1 to 8. 1 Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on left. VOLUME STEREO DISC PRESET /TUNING VCR 1 3 A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E or SP A D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO E1:FM 87.5 MHz Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. TV INPUT Front panel CBL/SAT TUNED MEMORY EDIT Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. 2,4 1 MUTE CH TV MUTE 1,3 V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD MD/TAPE DVD CD R TUNER CD PHONO MUTE SLEEP VOLUME TUNED MEMORY Remote control SP A A5:FM 90.6 MHz L R Note • Make sure that “TUNER” mode is selected if operating using the remote control. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET –/+ on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. 4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET /TUNING V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 SP A EDIT CH DISC VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD Remote control DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO TUNED SP A E1:FM 87.5 MHz 44 0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 44 DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER EDIT CD E1-A5 Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. PRESET/ TUNING Front panel D TV/LD MEMORY PRESET or CBL/SAT 02.7.24, 6:06 PM BASIC RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. 1 2 D I G I T A L STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE SPEAKERS A SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D–TV/LD CD–R B SILENT CBL/SAT VCR 1 BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT VCR2 /DVR PHONES A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING PROGRAM 6CH INPUT FM/AM MEMORY EDIT TUNER CD PHONO STEREO TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL V–AUX – + BASS – + TREBLE REC OUT /ZONE 2 EFFECT VIDEO AUX Turn on the power to this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2. • To record the current input source that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE. TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PHONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 • To record a source other than the one that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to the source you want to record. TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PHONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 Note 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. y ■ Timer playback/recording This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operation instruction for the component and the timer to be used. Notes • The stored data such as input source will be reflected in the playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output during the recording with a timer, turn the volume down. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode (disconnected from the AC outlet). However if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. English • Setting REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE and using the BGV function (see page 30) allows the recording of audio and video from a different source. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. 45 0107V3300_41-45_EN(UA) 45 02.7.24, 6:06 PM APPENDIX • At this setting, you can change the source to listen to or watch during recording by rotating INPUT (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software ADVANCED OPERATION SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD D-TV/LD CD-R If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION VOLUME NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RX-V3300 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION REC OUT/ZONE 2 allows you to record one source while watching and/or listening to another source. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES The remote control can operate other A/V components of YAMAHA and other manufacturers as well as this unit. To control those components, you must set up remote control with the manufacturer codes. This remote control also has two sophisticated features: Learn and Macro. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with an infrared remote control receiver. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence for operation by a single button, or to use the factory-set macros to operate other YAMAHA components. These features make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room. Notes • For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 7. • For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7. Control Area ■ Control area of this unit ■ Control area for each component The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown below. You can use the functions within this area no matter which component control area is selected. The component control area is the shaded area shown below. Each component has different functions for the operation buttons in the component control area. The component which has been chosen by pressing an input selector button or SOURCE SELECT k/n can be controlled and the display window shows the corresponding name of the component to be operated. MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM Input selector buttons, and Å/ı buttons MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER B PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT REC 10KEY DSP EX/ES – SEARCH POWER DSP is selected SOUND MENU DISPLAY STOP HALL 1 CHAPTER PAUSE HALL 2 CHURCH + PLAY JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. Å/ı buttons and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å/ı buttons is to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. Factory setting: Å ........... LD player ı ..... Satellite tuner MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER B PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE TITLE SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER + ENTER SELECT POWER REC DISPLAY PAUSE STOP – SEARCH A/B/C/D/E 10KEY DSP TV VOL MUTE ROCK CONCERT STEREO DISC EFFECT 6.1/ES PARAMETER SLEEP TEST HALL 2 CHURCH POWER REC JAZZ CLUB STOP HALL 1 1 VOLUME CH TV MUTE LEVEL CHAPTER 10 key is selected 2 3 ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E ROCK 11 CONCERT PRESET EX/ES TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. 1 +10 CH DISC PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 5 MONO MOVIE 8HALL 2 SELECT2 ENTER12 TAINMENT +100 6 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 7 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. VOLUME A/B/C/D/E PRESET STEREO TV INPUT EFFECT CH TV VOL TV MUTE DISC Component control area There are 13 component control areas. You can set up the manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in each area. See pages 55 to 59. 46 46 02.7.24, 6:06 PM 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MUTE CHP/INDEX TV MUTE PAUSE 4 7HALL 1 0 SET MENU 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) + PRESET TV INPUT ON SCREEN SOUND MENU PLAY SELECT REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. If you are to make a setting for different component from the factory setting, change the library as described in step 3 on right. Component category (Library) Manufacturer A LD Yamaha B SAT – PHONO TV – VCR – TUNER Yamaha-1 MD/TAPE MD Yamaha-1 CD-R CD-R Yamaha D-TV/LD TV – VCR 1 VCR – VCR 2/DVR VCR – DVD DVD Yamaha-1 CD CD Yamaha-1 CBL/SAT CABLE – ENTER A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Amplifier Library has the following four codes: YPC: Code to operate this unit. Zone 2: Code to use the Zone 2 function. DSP: Code to operate other Yamaha DSP amplifiers that cannot be operated with the YPC code. NO: Code to operate other manufacturers’ amplifiers using this unit’s remote control. 4 2 Press one of the buttons shaded below to check if it works for the component being set. If it does, the manufacturer code setting has been correctly made. 6CH INPUT TITLE APPENDIX Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to set up. The code to operate this unit has been preset in the supplied remote control. However you can change the code in Amplifier Library if necessary. ADVANCED OPERATION If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different component from the input selector name. Library choices: L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP, L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB, L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR ■ Amplifier Library (L:AMP) Note • You may not be able to operate your Yamaha component even if Yamaha manufacture code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other Yamaha manufacture code(s). 1 Press k / n to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. BASIC OPERATION V-AUX TUNER 3 PREPARATION Input area • Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process is started. • Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. INTRODUCTION You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each input area. Notes ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY LEARN SELECT POWER SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY English Note • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one. y • If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 47 02.7.24, 6:06 PM 47 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. 3 LEARN Place this remote control and the other remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. LEARN A B MACRO ON PHONO OFF MACRO CD CLEAR STANDBY CD-R RE-NAME MD/TAPE DVD TRANSMIT POWER TUNER VCR2/DVR SYSTEM V-AUX VCR 1 6CH INPUT CBL/SAT TITLE ENTER 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inch) 4 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN longer than three seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode. Learn Feature LEARN If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not available, the following procedure needs to be performed. The possible programming area is the same as a component control area, so the buttons are programmable independently for each source component area. Note 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. TRANSMIT RE-NAME MACRO B LEARN A CD-R VCR2/DVR MD/TAPE VCR 1 CLEAR STANDBY SYSTEM POWER TUNER CBL/SAT V-AUX D-TV/LD ENTER ON MACRO OFF CD PHONO DVD 6CH INPUT Set 10KEY/DSP to 10KEY. Notes • Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. • Do not press and hold LEARN longer than 3 seconds. Otherwise this unit enters the manufacturer code setting mode. TITLE ■ Programming a new remote control function Flashes alternately SOURCE • This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) 1 D-TV/LD SOURCE Notes • Supplied remote control does not store all the manufacturer codes for commercially availabvle AV components (including Yamaha AV components). Therefore it may not work to operate your AV component. If operation is not possible with any of the manfacturer codes, program the new remote control function with the Learn feature or use the remote control for the component. • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. 10KEY DSP Notes • It is also possible to program in the control area of this unit with 10KEY/DSP set to DSP. However, if you program functions in this area, you cannot control this unit and select a DSP program. 2 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select a source component. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO 48 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 48 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 6 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window LEARN MACRO B CLEAR A CD-R RE-NAME STANDBY MD/TAPE TRANSMIT POWER TUNER VCR2/DVR SYSTEM V-AUX VCR 1 ENTER CBL/SAT TITLE D-TV/LD SOURCE You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use the different name from the original input selector button names. This is useful when different component is set in the input selector button. ON MACRO OFF CD PHONO DVD 6CH INPUT 1 Notes 7 2 3 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program additional functions. B TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Press RE-NAME by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Press k / n to select a character. Choices are A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash). y • To learn functions in other source component control area, press SOURCE SELECT k / n in step 4 to select other source component. ENTER Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. 4 LEARN Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. ADVANCED OPERATION 8 BASIC OPERATION • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 5. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display window much earlier than this number. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make further learning on the remote control. A V-AUX PREPARATION Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. INTRODUCTION Press and hold the button on the other remote control that has the function you want to program into this remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. ENTER y • If you continuously want to rename another source component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME APPENDIX • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak – when the distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little – when the remote control infrared windows are not facing at the appropriate angle – when the remote control is exposed to the direct sunlight – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes Note • “ERROR” appears in the display window when pressing buttons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. English 49 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 49 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro Feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The macro buttons (the input selector buttons, Å and ı buttons, SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY) are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 51). Press one of the macro buttons Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially CD SYSTEM CD POWER Macro buttons PLAY (CD area) Second Third PHONO First PHONO – V-AUX V-AUX – TUNER TUNER – (*4) MD/TAPE MD/TAPE PLAY (MD/TAPE area) (*3) CD-R CD-R CD CD D-TV/LD D-TV/LD – CBL/SAT – PLAY (CD-R area) (*3) PLAY (CD area) (*3) SYSTEM POWER CBL/SAT (*1) VCR 1 VCR 1 PLAY VCR2/DVR VCR2/DVR DVD DVD PLAY (VCR 1 area) (*3) (VCR 2/DVR area) (*3) PLAY (DVD area) (*3) A – – B – – SYSTEM POWER POWER (D-TV/LD area) (*2) STANDBY STANDBY – – – *1 In order to turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit, connect those components to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, please refer to the operation instruction for the connected component.) *2 If the macro you select includes power control functions, the component may be turned off if it is already on when you press the macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the TV is turned off. *3 By factory setting, playback can be started with any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorders, CD players, CD recorders, DVD players, and LD players. When using macros to operate other components, it is either necessary to program the PLAY button on the control area of that component (see pages 48 and 49) or to set up a manufacturer code (see page 47). *4 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit receives the last station when this unit is set in the standby mode. 50 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 50 02.8.21, 7:01 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the macro MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR MACRO OFF ON POWER STANDBY A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD MACRO MACRO ON/OFF PHONO Press a macro button for which you want to program the macro operation. The button you chose for programming the macro operation and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. Macro buttons SYSTEM 1 2 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. POWER STANDBY A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO Press a macro button. Notes You can program your own macros and use the Macro feature to transmit many remote control commands by pressing a single button. 3 Press the buttons of the functions that you want to include in the macro operation sequence in order. y • You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits from the macro mode. SYSTEM Notes POWER STANDBY A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT • The factory-set macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The factory-set macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the factory-set macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • A macro programming is used to transmit learning or setup (or YAMAHA preset) button signals of this remote control to a macro button. If necessary, set up the manufacturer code or program a function with the remote control for your component. • This remote control handles button signals that operate continuously, such as volume control, as short time interval codes. Macro programming that include these types of macro steps are therefore not recommended. TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY 1 2 MCR 1 : DVD a MCR 2 : DVD p appear alternately so that you can set up the next step ADDITIONAL INFORMATION indicate the number of macro steps you entered Press MACRO by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO SEARCH REC SOUND MENU ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION ■ Programming a macro • “AGAIN” appears in the display window when a button other than the macro buttons is pressed. PREPARATION Note • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While this unit is carrying out a macro program, this unit does not receive any other button’s function until the macro operation has been completed (the TRANSMIT indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation has been completed. INTRODUCTION SYSTEM LEARN 2 Notes • Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. APPENDIX Note • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 2. • If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE SELECT k / n. When you use the input selector buttons, selecting the input is programmed as a macro step, whereas SOURCE SELECT k / n only changes the component. English 51 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 51 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. MACRO 2 Press k / n to select the clear mode. The mode is shown in the display window in the following order: (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions for the component area. Press the input selector button, Å or ı to select the component. Note • “ERROR” appears in the display when pressing butons other than indicated in each step, or more than one button at once. Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. Clears all learned functions for this unit control area. Clears all learned functions. Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes 1 Clears all programmed macros. Clears all renamed source names in the display window. Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Clears all programmed functions including setup manufacturer codes. This returns to the factory settings. CLEAR Note • Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. 3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function or macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. CLEAR Note • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. 52 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 52 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing a Learned Function 1 Press an input selector button, Å or ı to select the source component you want to clear the function. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD MACRO Note Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button for which you want to clear the macro for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. PREPARATION 2 2 Press MACRO to clear a programmed macro by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. • Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. PHONO D-TV/LD 1 INTRODUCTION You can clear the function learned in a certain programmable button in each area. Clearing a Macro Function MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN LEARN MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD B PHONO y Note 3 Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button for which you want to clear the function for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, try step 2 again. 3 Press MACRO again to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. ADVANCED OPERATION • Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. • You can clear other macros at this time by holding down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons for which those macros have been programmed. BASIC OPERATION SYSTEM POWER MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SYSTEM MACRO POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD y • You can clear other learned functions at this time by holding down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons for which those learned functions have been programmed. APPENDIX Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, try step 3 again. 4 Press LEARN again to LEARN exit. Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. English 53 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 53 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ SOURCE SELECT k / n ■ Light up function You can control another component independently from the input you have selected by pressing an input selector button. The buttons which are active and the display window light up for 10 seconds after pressing LIGHT. Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to choose the component and set the remote control to be used for it. The display window will show one of the following: (when pressing n) OPTN (option), Å, ı, PHONO, V-AUX, TUNER, MD, CD-R, CD, TV/LD (TV or digital TV/LD), CBSAT (cable TV/satellite tuner), VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD. MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM MACRO OFF ON STANDBY A V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD POWER B PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY y SELECT • Pressing k shows the same in the reverse order, but you cannot select OPTN. POWER 10KEY DSP SELECT ■ OPTN (option) area OPTN is an extra component control area that can be programmed with other remote control functions. y • For the signals that will be used only in macro, it is recommended to learn signals in the OPTN area. Note • You cannot set up the manufacturer code in this area. 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT POWER REC SOUND MENU – SEARCH STOP CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY Pressing n always selects OPTN first ■ Zone 2 When you make up a second audio-video room with this unit’s Zone 2 feature, you must set “Zone2” as the amplifier library in the remote control first. Selecting “Zone2” by pressing k sets the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. See pages 75 and 76 for details. 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER REC SOUND MENU SEARCH STOP – CHAPTER PAUSE + PLAY Pressing k selects “Zone2” first 54 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 54 HALL 1 CHAPTER + STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER Area that lights up (Only buttons that send the signal light up in orange.) SOURCE DISPLAY – SEARCH REC SOUND MENU 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Each Component Control Area ■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE Menu cursor/ENTER ENTER MENU DISPLAY SEARCH POWER Return PREPARATION TITLE (TOP MENU) SOURCE SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT – SEARCH POWER REC STOP + CHAPTER PAUSE INTRODUCTION The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. After setting the manufacturer code, press an input selector button, Å / ı, or SOURCE SELECT k / n to select a component you want to control. Audio Skip search PLAY PLAY PAUSE HALL 1 10KEY DSP EX/ES HALL 2 JAZZ CLUB 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 7 8 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Title/Index CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E * CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION STOP Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT MUTE TV VOL VOLUME CH DISC +/– (disc skip) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT ■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR areas) SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER ADVANCED OPERATION * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. + SEARCH POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB PLAY PAUSE 10KEY DSP EX/ES TV/Video input 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX * A/B/C/D/E Numeric buttons 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. APPENDIX POWER Record (Press twice to start recording) STOP MUTE VOLUME CH CH +/– (channel) STEREO TV MUTE EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. 55 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 55 7/26/02, 5:53 PM English DISC REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/LD area) or a cable TV/satellite TV (CBL/ SAT area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH POWER REC CHAPTER + STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB POWER HALL 1 10KEY DSP EX/ES Enter TV INPUT CHP/INDEX TV VOL +/– TV VOL 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. * Numeric buttons SELECT PRESET TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH CH +/– (channel) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT TV MUTE * SEARCH, REC, STOP, PAUSE and PLAY function to operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1. ■ Operating an LD player (D-TV/LD area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search) SEARCH POWER POWER STOP SOUND + 10KEY DSP EX/ES Chapter/Time REC HALL 1 STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E * Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 47 because TV is factory-set for this input selector button. * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in PHONO. 56 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 56 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a CD player (CD area) SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD INTRODUCTION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH + CHAPTER SEARCH Skip search REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB PLAY PAUSE 10KEY DSP EX/ES INDEX PREPARATION POWER POWER STOP 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX * A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. Numeric buttons SELECT Clear PRESET TV INPUT MUTE VOLUME CH DISC +/– (disc skip) STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. BASIC OPERATION TV VOL ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area) STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD ADVANCED OPERATION SYSTEM POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER DISPLAY SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH CHAPTER + Skip serch SEARCH POWER Record (MD only) POWER 10KEY DSP STOP EX/ES REC HALL 1 STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E Numeric buttons SELECT Clear (CD-R only) PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE APPENDIX INDEX (CD-R only) * ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCE MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. English 57 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 57 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT SOUND MENU DISPLAY – SEARCH A/B + CHAPTER Direction A/B SEARCH backward/forward POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB Record HALL 1 10KEY DSP STOP EX/ES 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 INDEX CHP/INDEX * A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. PLAY PAUSE Numeric button SELECT PRESET TV INPUT MUTE TV VOL VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT * TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function to operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/LD or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both DTV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/LD area. ■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SELECT POWER POWER 10KEY DSP EX/ES Preset group A Preset group B REC HALL 1 CHAPTER + STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. SELECT Preset number 1 to 8 Preset group E Preset group D PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE VOLUME CH PRESET +/– STEREO TV MUTE Preset group A/B/C/D/E – SEARCH CHP/INDEX Preset group C SOUND MENU DISPLAY DISC EFFECT 58 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 58 02.7.24, 6:06 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the component set in Å or ı YAMAHA LD player is factory-set in Å and satellite tuner in ı. However if you want to set other component, set the manufacturer code for the component you want to set in the Å / ı button following the manufacturer code setting procedure described on page 47. SYSTEM STANDBY A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD PREPARATION POWER 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE POWER 10KEY DSP EX/ES – SEARCH REC HALL 1 CHAPTER + STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL 7 /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION The functions of these buttons in the component control area differ for the component you set in Å or ı. SOUND MENU DISPLAY SELECT INTRODUCTION These buttons are not input selector buttons but simply provide the space for an extra component to control with this unit’s remote control without making connection to this unit. The white area shown below can be used for the component set in Å and ı, and the function for each button differs depending on the component. MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE EFFECT ADVANCED OPERATION DISC ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 59 0108V3300_46-59_EN(UA) 59 02.7.24, 6:06 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 16 items including the speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. 8 INPUT MODE 9 PARAM. INI y 11 D. RANGE • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. Note • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. 1 10 LFE LEVEL 12 SP DELAY 13 DISPLAY SET 14 MEMORY GUARD 15 6CH INPUT SET 16 ZONE 2 SET Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU SPEAKER SET 1A CENTER SP Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Adjustment procedures are explained using SET MENU 2 LOW FRQ TEST as an example. 1B MAIN SP 1C REAR L/R SP 1D REAR CT SP 5 1E LFE/BASS OUT 10KEY DSP EX/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E 2 LOW FRQ TEST 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL 5 CENTER GEQ 6 INPUT RENAME 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT 1 2 7A CMPNT-V INPUT VOLUME STEREO DISC 1H SP B SET SELECT MUTE CH TV MUTE 2, 3, 5 3, 4 8 /DTS SUR. PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL 1G MAIN LEVEL JAZZ CLUB 2 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 CHP/INDEX 1F FRONT EFCT SP CHURCH 1 ROCK CONCERT EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to SET MENU. 1 PARAMETER SET MENU Press k / n repeatedly to select the item (1 to 16) you want to adjust. SET MENU 1/4 7B OPTICAL OUT 1 ≥ 2 3 4 7C OPTICAL IN 7D COAXIAL IN SPEAKER SET LOW FRQ TEST L/R BALANCE HP TONE CTRL / : Up/Down -/+ : Enter Note • If k is pressed when SET MENU 1 is selected, and if n is pressed when SET MENU 16 is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press k / n to open SET MENU again. 60 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 60 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU 3 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. y • Select SML/SMALL if the woofer diameter of you speaker is smaller than 16 cm. If it is larger than 16 cm, select LRG/ LARGE. INTRODUCTION Press –/+ once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. Note Depending on the item, press n to select a sub item. Press –/+ repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 2 LOW FRQ TEST ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz Press k / n repeatedly until the current DSP program appears or simply press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit from the SET MENU. 10KEY DSP or HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 /DTS SUR. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. ADVANCED OPERATION 5 By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. BASIC OPERATION 4 ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) PREPARATION 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE SELECT 1A CENTER SP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. LRG SML NONE APPENDIX NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the left and right main speakers. 1A CENTER SP English LRG SML NONE 61 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 61 7/26/02, 6:01 PM SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. 1B MAIN SP ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1B MAIN SP LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL Note LRG SML NONE • When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. 1C REAR L/R SP LRG SML NONE Note • If “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE, “1D REAR CT SP” will be skipped. y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP” (see page 34). 62 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 62 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU ■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide more realistic frontto-back and transitions. The initial setting is “LRG”. LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals are directed to both main right and left speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Note • If “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE, “1D REAR CT SP” will be skipped. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. 1E LFE/BASS OUT 1D REAR CT SP PREPARATION LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to the rear center speaker. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH INTRODUCTION ■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center speaker mode) SWFR MAIN BOTH SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. 1E LFE/BASS OUT LRG SML NONE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION NONE Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of the rear center channel signal are directed to the left and right rear speakers. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. LFE signals for the main L/R speakers are output from both L/R speakers and subwoofer. 1E LFE/BASS OUT 1D REAR CT SP ADVANCED OPERATION SWFR MAIN BOTH 1D REAR CT SP BASIC OPERATION LRG SML NONE SWFR MAIN BOTH Note LRG SML NONE APPENDIX • The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main, center, rear and rear center channels are directed to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D. English 63 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 63 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU ■ 1F FRONT EFCT SP (front effect speaker mode) This unit uses front effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources of the sound field programs. If you do not use front effect speakers, you can direct the front effect signals to the main speakers. The OSD shows small or no front effect speakers depending on how you set this item. –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 1G MAIN LEVEL Normal -10dB Choices: YES, NONE Initial setting: YES YES Select this setting if you use front effect speakers. 1F FRONT EFCT SP ■ 1H SP B SET (speaker B set) Use this feature to select the location of the main speakers to be connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: MAIN, ZONE B Initial setting: MAIN YES NONE NONE Select this setting if you do not use front effect speakers. The front effect signals are mixed with the main channels. MAIN Select this to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. 1H SP B SET “MAIN ZONE B 1F FRONT EFCT SP -/+ : Select / : Exit YES NONE ■ 1G MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, rear (L/R) and rear center speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. ZONE B Select this if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the second room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the effect speakers in the main room are muted and the sound is output only from SPEAKERS B. 1H SP B SET MAIN Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal Normal Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 1G MAIN LEVEL Normal “ZONE B -/+ : Select / : Exit y • When a DSP program is selected, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. If the headphones are connected to PHONES jack on this unit in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode, this unit enters the SILENT CINEMA DSP mode and the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. -10dB 64 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 64 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU 4 2 LOW FRQ TEST 1 Press –/+ to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you can hear the tone. 2 LOW FRQ TEST The test tone is produced by the tone generator. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter beside a wide-band noise. You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps. You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. Digital generator (wide band noise produced) Notes 2 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF ≥ OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz Press n to go to “FRQ” and press –/+ to select the frequency you want to use. 2 LOW FRQ TEST TEST TONE………OFF OUTPUT…MAIN L/R ≥ FRQ……………………88Hz Freq. Center freq. 35 Hz – 250 Hz Band pass filter 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. Control range: 10 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 Noise ADVANCED OPERATION Press n to go to “OUTPUT” and press –/+ to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU. BASIC OPERATION • Do not turn up the volume too high. • If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. PREPARATION ≥ TEST TONE…………ON OUTPUT…MAIN L/R FRQ……………………88Hz ■ About the test tone INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting with the remote control while sitting in the listening position. Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. Press + to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press – for the right main speaker. APPENDIX 3 L/R BALANCE L …………………… ……………………R 0 -/+ : Adjust / : Exit English 65 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 65 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. 6 INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. Control range (dB): –6 to +3 for both BASS and TRBL (treble) Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ 4 HP TONE CTRL ≥ BASS TRBL -/+ : Position / : Character + - 0dB 2 Press –/+ to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) 6 INPUT RENAME DVD ≥ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. 3 Press n to select a higher frequency and k to select a lower frequency. 5 CENTER GEQ ≥ 100Hz 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz - 0dB DVD -/+ : Position / : Character Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band 1 DVD Press k / n to select the character you want to use and –/+ to move to the next one. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order. A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, and so on. • Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other inputs. 6 INPUT RENAME + DVD ≥ DVD1 -/+ : Position / : Character 2 Press –/+ to adjust the level of that frequency. Note 5 CENTER GEQ 100Hz ≥ 300Hz 1kHz 3kHz 10kHz • You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs. 4 - +3dB + Press + repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. y • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” or “TEST DSP” appears on the video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST (see pages 26 to 28). 66 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 66 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT Choices: 7C OPTICAL IN BASIC OPERATION [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD [B] CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1 Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] CBL/SAT (3) CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R (4) CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE (5) DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD (6) CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/ TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1 Initial settings: (3) CD (4) CD-R (5) DVD (6) CBL/SAT (3)…………… CD (4)…………… CD-R ≥ (5)…………… DVD (6)……………CBL/SAT 7A CMPNT-V INPUT ≥ [A]…………… DVD [B]……………CBL/SAT Choices: Choices: (7) CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R (8) D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT Initial settings: (7) CD (8) D-TV/LD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (1) MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR, VCR 1, CBL/ SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD (2) CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/ DVR, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, D-TV/LD, DVD, MD/TAPE Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE (2) CD-R ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7) and (8) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) PREPARATION ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: INTRODUCTION It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT (the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3) to (6) 7D COAXIAL IN (7)…………… CD ≥ (8)……………D-TV/LD 7B OPTICAL OUT ≥ (1)……………MD/TAPE (2)…………… CD-R Note APPENDIX • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. English 67 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 67 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 31 for details about the input mode). 8 INPUT MODE AUTO LAST 10 LFE LEVEL This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –20 to 0 for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE -/+ : Select / : Exit 1 Press k / n to select the item to be adjusted. Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO 10 LFE LEVEL ≥ SPEAKER………………0dB HEADPHONE…………0dB AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. 2 Press –/+ to adjust the LFE level. Note 10 LFE LEVEL • Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button will not be recalled. ≥ SPEAKER…………-11dB HEADPHONE…………0dB 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. Press the corresponding numeric button for the DSP program that you want to initialize. The asterisk (*) next to the program number means that the parameter values have been changed. 9 PARAM. INI 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 *10 Press 11 No. Key Notes • You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately. • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 71), you cannot initialize any program groups. • Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings. 68 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 68 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU 11 D-RANGE (dynamic range) 11 D-RANGE ≥ SP: MAX STD MIN HP: MAX STD MIN MAX Select the “MAX” setting for feature films. MIN Select the “MIN” setting for listening to sources at extremely low volume levels. 1 2 BASIC OPERATION STD Select the “STD” (Standard) setting for general use. PREPARATION Choices: MAX, STD, MIN Initial setting: MAX (for both speakers and headphones) Use this feature to adjust the delay of the Center and the Rear Center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speakers with a source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right Main speakers. However, in most home situations, the Center speaker or the Rear Center speaker is placed in line with the Main speakers or the Rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker, the apparent distance from the Center speaker and the Rear Center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right Main speaker, and the left and right Rear speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the Center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. 12 SP DELAY Press k / n to select “UNIT”. Press –/+ to select the unit to be used for setting. Select one from “msec”, “meters”, and “feet”. Notes 3 Press k / n to select the speaker for which the delay is adjusted. 4 Press –/+ to set the delay. Press + for higher value and – for lower value. ADVANCED OPERATION • Setting items change depending on the unit chosen. • When “meters” or “feet” is selected, enter the distance from your listening position to each speaker. 12 SP DELAY ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ≥ UNIT……………………msec CENTER……………0.0ms REAR CT…………3.0ms Center speaker image R RC RR English RL C APPENDIX C L RC 69 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 69 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU ■ Setting by “msec” Control range: Initial settings: 0 to 5.0 ms (for center), 0 to 30.0 ms (for rear center) 0 ms (for center), 3.0 ms (for rear center) 13 DISPLAY SET 13 DISPLAY SET ≥ DIMMER………………………0 OSD SHIFT………………0 GRAY BACK………AUTO V CONV.………………OFF 12 SP DELAY ≥ UNIT……………………msec CENTER……………0.0ms REAR CT…………3.0ms ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. ■ Setting by “meters” Control range: Initial settings: 0.15 to 30.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/R, rear center) 3.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/ R), 2.10 m (for rear center) 12 SP DELAY ≥ UNIT………………meters MAIN L/R………3.00m CENTER……………3.00m REAR L/R………3.00m REAR CT…………2.10m ■ Setting by “feet” Control range: Initial settings: 0.5 to 100 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/R, rear center) 10.0 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/ R), 7.0 ft (for rear center) 12 SP DELAY ≥ UNIT……………………feet MAIN L/R……10.0ft CENTER…………10.0ft REAR L/R……10.0ft REAR CT…………7.0ft Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 Press + to lower the position of the OSD. Press – to raise the position of the OSD. ■ GRAY BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed on the screen including the onscreen display if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Initial setting: AUTO Note • If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be displayed on the screen when video signals are not being input. ■ V CONV. (Video conversion) Note • No delay will be set if the same distance is set for the main L/R and center, or the rear L/R and rear center with “meters” or “feet” selected. Use this feature to turn on/off the function to convert composite signals to S-video signals to output through the S-video jack when no S-video signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF OFF Select this not to convert composite signals to S-video signals. ON Select this to convert composite signals to S-video signals. 70 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 70 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU 14 MEMORY GUARD 15 6CH INPUT SET Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center and subwoofer channels when the source component is connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF ■ 15A CENTER to (direction of the center channel signals) 14 MEMORY GUARD OFF ON Choices: CENTER, MAIN Initial setting: CENTER PREPARATION -/+ : Select / : Exit This item sets the direction of the signals input into the CENTER jack. 15A CENTER to Notes • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “14 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. CENTER MAIN CENTER The input signals are output from the center speaker. MAIN The input signals are directed to the main L/R speakers with same level. This item sets the direction of the signals input into the SUBWOOFER jack. Choices: SWFR, MAIN Initial setting: SWFR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 15B SWFR to ADVANCED OPERATION ■ 15B SWFR to (direction of the signals input into the subwoofer) BASIC OPERATION Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, rear center, front effect, and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode INTRODUCTION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. SWFR MAIN SWFR The input signals are output from the subwoofer. APPENDIX MAIN The input signals are directed to the main L/R speakers with same level. English 71 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 71 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SET MENU 16 ZONE2 SET Use this feature to make a setting for audio output to ZONE 2 OUT. 16 ZONE2 SET ≥ OUTPUT VOL……VAR. SP OUT…………………OFF ■ OUTPUT VOL (output volume) This item changes the volume control setting for audio output to ZONE 2 OUT. Choices: VAR., FIX Initial setting: VAR. VAR. To adjust the ZONE 2 OUT volume with VOLUME +/– on the remote control. FIX To fix the ZONE 2 OUT volume to the volume level of this unit. ■ SP OUT Use this feature to switch assignment of the front effect speakers’ output destination. Choices: OFF, ON Initial setting: OFF ON To assign the amplifier outputs for the front effect channel to the ZONE 2 OUT SPEAKERS terminals. OFF To assign the amplifier outputs for the front effect channel to FRONT EFFECT speaker terminals as normal operation. y • When SP OUT is set to ON, 1F FRONT EFCT SP will be automatically set to NONE. When it is switched to OFF, 1F FRONT EFCT SP will be set to the previous setting. Note • When SP OUT is set to ON, it is not necessary to connect ZONE 2 OUT jacks. 72 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 72 02.7.24, 6:07 PM ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS Adjustment should be made with the remote control. A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST Press –/+ to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center, left and right rear, front effect or rear center speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. STEREO TV MUTE SET MENU 1 Notes 1 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. PARAMETER SET MENU Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear, rear center, left rear, front effect and subwoofer. LEVEL Rear center speaker output level Left rear speaker output level APPENDIX Front effect speaker output level ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Right rear speaker output level ADVANCED OPERATION Center speaker output level Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. BASIC OPERATION 2 • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone (“TEST DOLBY SUR.” or “TEST DSP”) will be changed. • When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you cannot adjust the output level by using LEVEL. However, each time you press LEVEL, the current level of each speaker appears on the front panel display and you can check the speaker level. • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER SP”, “1C REAR L/R SP”, “1D REAR CT SP” and “1F FRONT EFCT SP” are set to NONE, and “1E LFE/BASS OUT” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • During playback of the source input through the 6CH INPUT jacks, the level can be adjusted independently for the center, right and left rear, and subwoofer. PREPARATION 2 3 VOLUME CH 3 INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear, rear center, front effect and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. Subwoofer output level y English • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing n/k. 73 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 73 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). Canceling the Sleep Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. y SLEEP • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Setting the Sleep Timer 10KEY DSP EX/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 6 7 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E /DTS SUR. y 8 SELECT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE VOLUME CH STEREO TV MUTE DISC EFFECT PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SLEEP TEST SET MENU 2 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for sleep timer. SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP OFF V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT SLEEP 90 min. SLEEP 30 min. D TV/LD DVD SLEEP MD/TAPE CD R SLEEP 60 min. TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SLEEP SP A 120min L R The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. V AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 CBL/SAT D TV/LD DVD MD/TAPE CD R TUNER CD PHONO SLEEP VOLUME DSP DIGITAL SP A CONCERT HALL1 L R 74 0109V3300_60-74_EN(UA) 74 02.7.24, 6:07 PM ZONE 2 Only analog signals are sent to the second room. For any source you want to listen to in the second room, you must connect the analog output jack from the source to the corresponding analog input jack on this unit. Zone 2 Connections PREPARATION To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment: • An infrared signal receiver in the second room • An infrared emitter in the main room This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room (for example, to a CD player or LD player). • An amplifier and speakers for the second room • A video monitor for the second room INTRODUCTION You can make up a multi-room audio-video system with this unit. This feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room and second room (Zone 2) with the supplied remote control in the second room. y IN OUT This unit • Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Example of a system configuration and connections ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT Main room Second room Amplifier This unit Video monitor ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DVD player (or other component) Remote control DVD INPUT Infrared signal receiver Infrared emitter REMOTE CONTROL IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2 volume with the control on the amplifier in the second room. • DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS to avoid unexpected noise. APPENDIX REMOTE CONTROL OUT BASIC OPERAIONT IN OUT REMOTE CONTROL OUT English 75 0110V3300_75-76_EN(UA) 75 02.7.24, 6:07 PM ZONE 2 ■ Special considerations when using DTS software 5 Press SOURCE SELECT k to display “Zone2” in the display window. The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Therefore, if you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room, you will only be able to hear the digital noise sound that could damage your speakers. SOURCE Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second room, as follows: • LDs Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. • DVDs Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded with DTS DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS to avoid unexpected noise. SELECT 6 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. SYSTEM * PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR DVD * The SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY button on the remote control works for the second room. 7 You can control the component by using the component control area buttons. 6CH INPUT Remote Control in Zone 2 TITLE ENTER SOURCE In the second room (Zone 2), the supplied remote control can be used for the Zone 2 remote control. You can select the input source and control the component which is located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. SELECT POWER 10KEY DSP EX/ES REC HALL 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting the Manufacturer Code” on page 47. 2 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”. PLAY HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 TV INPUT TV VOL VOLUME STEREO DISC EFFECT Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2 mode. SELECT ENTER 4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone 2 setup. LEARN 76 0110V3300_75-76_EN(UA) 76 8 SELECT MUTE CH SOURCE Press k / n to select “Zone2”. /DTS SUR. PRESET ENTER 3 + PAUSE ROCK CONCERT A/B/C/D/E 8 CHAPTER STOP TV MUTE 1 – SEARCH CHP/INDEX Before starting the following procedure, set REC OUT/ ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE. SOUND MENU DISPLAY 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. See “DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS” on pages 79 to 82. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. ADVANCED OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. BASIC OPERATION Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. PREPARATION ■ Elements of a sound field Sound Field Program Parameters INTRODUCTION What Is a Sound Field? APPENDIX English 77 0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 77 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Changing Parameter Settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 3 10KEY DSP EX/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 2 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 6 7 5 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. MUTE VOLUME EFFECT PARAMETER TEST 6 SELECT STEREO DISC LEVEL Press –/+ to change the parameter value. When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. 8 /DTS SUR. CH TV MUTE SLEEP 5 PRESET TV VOL ON SCREEN Press k / n to select the parameter. JAZZ CLUB 1 ROCK CONCERT CHP/INDEX 4 2 5 CHURCH 4 SET MENU 1 Notes 1 2 3 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. PARAMETER SET MENU Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN Select a DSP program you want to adjust. 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Program No. /DTS SUR. 8 SELECT Program name P05 ROCK CONCERT Cursor The Roxy Theatre DSP LEVEL…………0dB ≥ INIT.DLY…………15ms ROOM SIZE…………1.0 LIVENESS…………………5 REV.TIME…………1.6s Parameters Parameter valves Example of the parameter setting display • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “14 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 71). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ■ To reset some of the parameters to the factory-set values Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold –/+ until the value temporarily stops at the factoryset value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. ■ To reset all of the parameters to the factory-set values Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within the selected group to the factory-set values (see page 68). This operation resets all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values. 78 0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 78 02.7.24, 6:07 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: Control Range –6 dB – +3 dB This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the direct sound. Function: Description: Control Range 1 – 99 msec This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, and for a large room, it would be set to a large value. PREPARATION ■ INIT. DLY (Initial Delay) [P. INT. DLY for the presence sound field] INTRODUCTION You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. Source Sound BASIC OPERATION Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time INIT.DLY Time INIT.DLY INIT.DLY Sound Source ADVANCED OPERATION Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE [P. ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field] Description: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Function: Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 Time Level Level Time Early Reflections APPENDIX Level Source Sound Time Sound Source English Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 79 0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 79 02.7.24, 6:07 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Source Sound Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Time Sound Source Small Reflected Sound Large Reflected Sound Small value = 0 ■ S. DELAY (Surround Delay) Function: Large value = 10 Control Range 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) This parameter adjusts the delay for surround signals and surround sound field. ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround Initial Delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround Room Size) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround Liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. ■ RC INIT. DLY (Rear Center Initial Delay) Function: Control Range 0.1 – 2.0 This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. ■ RC LIVENESS (Rear Center Liveness) Function: Control Range 1 – 49 msec This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. ■ RC ROOM SIZE (Rear Center Room Size) Function: Control Range 0 –10 Control Range 0 – 10 This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. 80 0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 80 02.7.24, 6:07 PM DIGITAL SOUND SOUND FIELD FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS EDITING ■ REV. TIME (Reverberation Time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Reverberation Source Sound Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB 60 dB REV. TIME REV. TIME Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV. DELAY (Reverberation Delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Level Description: Control Range 0 – 250 msec BASIC OPERATION Small value = 1.0 s Function: PREPARATION REV. TIME Sound Source INTRODUCTION Description: Control Range 1.0 – 5.0 sec Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV. TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation Level) Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Source Sound APPENDIX Level Function: Description: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REV. DELAY REV. LEVEL English Time 81 0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 81 02.7.24, 6:07 PM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS For 8ch Stereo ■ CT LEVEL (Center Level) Function: This parameter adjusts the volume level for the center channel in 8-channel stereo mode. ■ RL LEVEL (Rear Left Level) Function: Music ■ PANORAMA Control Range OFF/ON Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume level for the front effect right channel in 8-channel stereo mode. For PRO LOGIC Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume level for the front effect left channel in 8-channel stereo mode. ■ FR LEVEL (Front Right Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume level for the rear center channel in 8-channel stereo mode. ■ FL LEVEL (Front Left Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume level for the rear right channel in 8-channel stereo mode. ■ RC LEVEL (Rear Center Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % This parameter adjusts the volume level for the rear left channel in 8-channel stereo mode. ■ RR LEVEL (Rear Right Level) Function: Control Range 0 – 100 % Control Range –3 – STD – +3 Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. ■ CT WIDTH (Center Width) Function: Control Range 0 – 7 Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. For DTS Neo: 6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center Image) Function: Control Range 0 – 0.5 This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers. 82 0111V3300_77-82_EN(UA) 82 7/26/02, 6:04 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General Problem Firmly connect the power cord. The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in the standby mode. The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode (see page 24). The GRAY BACK setting under “13 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is input to this unit. Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD (see page 70). Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons) (see page 29). The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections (see page 12). The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B (see page 29). The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume (see page 30). The signals that this unit cannot reproduce such as a CD-ROM are being input. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of jack (between S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) for both the input and output. ADVANCED OPERATION No sound and/or no picture. The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. BASIC OPERAIONT On-screen display does not appear. Remedy PREPARATION This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 83 0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 83 02.7.25, 7:11 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. No sound from the effect speakers. The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume (see page 30). Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. The sound effect is off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on (see page 34). The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center, rear L/R or rear center channel signals. No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the rear center speaker. No sound from the subwoofer. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker (see pages 26 and 27). “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker (see page 61). One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 6 except for Game and 8ch Stereo) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers (see pages 26 and 27). “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the rear L/R speakers (see page 62). A monaural source is being played with the program 11. Select another DSP program. “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. If the speaker mode for the rear L/R speakers is set to NONE, the speaker mode for the rear center speaker is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the rear L/R speaker mode (see page 62). “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML (see page 63). “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH (see page 63). “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH (see page 63). The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). 84 0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 84 02.7.25, 7:11 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy “Digital output” and “Dolby Digital” or “DTS” are not selected on the connected components. Make an appropriate setting following the operation instructions for your component. Poor bass reproduction. “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN (see page 63). The output mode for each speaker (main, center, rear, or rear center) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration (see pages 61– 64). Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit (see page 19). The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier (see page 18). The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded. A source component is connected to the analog input jacks of this unit for digital recording. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. Digital connections are not made between this unit and other components for playback or recording. Make digital connections. A source component is connected to the digital input jacks of this unit for analog recording. Connect a source component to the analog input jacks. Analog connections are not made between this unit and other components for playback or recording. Make analog connections. PREPARATION A “humming” sound can be heard. INTRODUCTION Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) BASIC OPERAIONT ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Some recording components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. “14 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF (see page 71). This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. APPENDIX The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. English 85 0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 85 02.7.25, 7:11 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Remedy Cause The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of this unit. There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. ■ Tuner Problem FM/ AM FM AM Cause Remedy Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. Use the manual tuning method. There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. 86 0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 86 02.7.25, 7:11 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem Remedy The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel (see page 7). Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries. The manufacturer code has not been correctly set. Set the manufacturer code correctly (see page 47). PREPARATION Wrong distance or angle. Try to set the other codes of the same maufacturer (see page 47). Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons on this unit’s remote control using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/ or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries (see page 3). The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance (see page 48). The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary functions (see page 53). ADVANCED OPERATION Even if the maufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. BASIC OPERAIONT The remote control does not “learn” new functions. INTRODUCTION The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 87 0112V3300_83-87_EN(UA) 87 02.7.25, 7:11 PM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. Dolby Pro Logic is the improved technique to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround programs. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with two left and right main channels, a center channel, and two left and right rear channels compared with one limited rear channel for the conventional Pro Logic technology. Also the music mode is available for 2channel sources in addition to the movie mode. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five fullrange audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX This unit is equipped with the Dolby Digital decoder that can reproduce 5.1-channel sources adding a rear center channel. (The sound to be output from a rear center speaker is created by mixing the content of rear L/R channels.) This decoder is the most suitable to reproduce the soundtrack for the movies recorded by Dolby Digital Surround EX. You can enjoy dynamic and realistic sounds by adding another channel. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ■ DTS ES (Extended Surround) This unit is equipped with the DTS ES decoder that can reproduce 5.1-channel sources adding a rear center channel. The DTS ES decoder on this unit is compatible with the two types of format: Discrete 6.1 and Matrix 6.1. The DTS ES Discrete decoder enables the 6.1-channel playback by adding a rear center channel recorded independently from the 5.1 channels. The DTS ES Matrix decoder enables the 6.1-channel playback by adding a rear center created from the rear L/R channels. This decoder is the most suitable to reproduce the music or the soundtrack of the movies recorded by DTS ES. ■ Neo: 6 Neo: 6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 achieves the high quality playback with all 5.1 channels at the sampling frequency 96 kHz / 24 bit. 88 0113V3300_88-91_EN(UA) 88 02.7.24, 6:07 PM GLOSSARY ■ Component video signal This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ CINEMA DSP D I G I T A L YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ I/O assignment (SET MENU) APPENDIX Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ S VIDEO signal ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. BASIC OPERAIONT ■ SILENT CINEMA ■ PCM (Linear PCM) PREPARATION Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. INTRODUCTION ■ LFE 0.1 channel English 89 0113V3300_88-91_EN(UA) 89 02.7.24, 6:07 PM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power Main, Center, Rear, R. Center (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.02% THD, 8 Ω) ............................... 130 W Front effect (1 kHz, 0.05% THD, 8 Ω) .................................................. 25 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. model] ................................................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Australia model] .......................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 155/195/250/340 W • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 200 or more • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω, MAIN IN to Main L/R ......... 0.008% • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) Phono MM (5 mV) to Main L/R .......................................... 86 dB CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION .................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz • Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level REC OUT .............................................................. 150 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ ΖΟΝΕ 2 ................................................................. 150 mV/1.5 kΩ • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. model] .................................................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Australia model] ................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. model] .................................................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] ....................................................... 500 W/640 VA [Australia model] ................................................................. 500 W Standby mode ............................................................ 0.7 W or less • AC Outlets [U.S.A. model] .......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Australia model] ................................. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 191 x 453 mm (17-1/8" x 7-1/2" x 17-13/16") • Weight ................................................................. 22 kg (48 lbs 8 oz) VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type .......................................................... NTSC/PAL • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 60 MHz, –3 dB 90 0113V3300_88-91_EN(UA) 90 02.7.25, 7:13 PM UA RX-V3300 AV Receiver YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN Printed MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V3300(UA)-cv1/4 1 OWNER’S MANUAL in Malaysia V977800-1 02.8.21, 7:06 PM